Home
        Common Channel Signaling 7
         Contents
1.                                                                                                           If the software load is Do  present Step 16  not present Step 14    Obtain a list of LIM unit cards and replace them one by one  resetting the LIM    unit after you replace each one        If the software Do  loads Step 16  does not load Step 15       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 14 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting a LIM unit  end        15 Replace the backplane     Go to Step 16   16 At the MAP terminal  test and return the LIM unit to service     17 You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 15    Troubleshooting a link that continually fails and recovers    Application    Use this procedure to troubleshoot a link that continually fails and recovers   This is commonly known as a thrashing link     Definition  A large number of logs are generated when a links fails  and more logs are  generated when the link recovers  Since thrashing links continually fail and  recover  the logging systems for CCS7 nodes become overloaded  Similar log  overload problems occur for every associated node in the local network     The effect of a thrashing link is greatest when there is only one link in the  linkset    You can identify a thrashing link by   e checking for recurring logs    e entering the OMSHOW command and checking the C7LKFAIL register  for li
2.                          Meaning  The directory you are trying to access is not loaded or must be accessed  through another directory     Action  None                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 26 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  Command   INTERCEPT  Directory   C7TU C7TULINK  Function    Use the INTERCEPT command to intercept messages before they enter the  CCS7 network or after they exit the network  To intercept specific CCS7  messages  make an entry in the match table  To change an entry in the match  table  use the REMOVE command to remove the current entry  then enter the  new entry using the INTERCEPT command     Usage notes    CAUTION   Service disruption   Never use the intercept capabilities of C7TU in an  operating office environment  All CCS7 messaging traffic  that matches the selected criteria will be halted in the  selected node                 The INTERCEPT command is qualified by the following exceptions   restrictions  and limitations     e Each INTERCEPT command must be followed by a corresponding  MONITOR command     e If the message code used in a INTERCEPT command string is not in the  list of valid message codes  the INTERCEPT command does not work   Use the C7TU directory MSGCODE command to review a list of current   valid message codes     e Match entries are matched from the first entry in the match table  The  process stops when the search finds a valid match entry or if the search  does not produce a
3.                      that detected the link failure first   Carrier      DS30                                Tx Carrier Carrier TH  channel channel channel  bank   bank            Facility fault       Failure reason   Out of service  signals from far end     Failure reason   Excessive signal unit error rate   Detects the failure first  removes  the link from service  transmits  an out of service signal to end  office at far end              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 8 Advanced troubleshooting procedures  Troubleshooting a facility fault  continued     Example of a hardware loopback test       In the loopback test shown below  the sync state of the link changes from SYSB to RPO   The link is good up to the loopback   Carrier        DS30    channel    Carrier Digital Carrier  bank                          Carrier  channel  bank                    channel cross  channel  bank connect bank          Loopback Facility fault    In the loopback test shown below  the sync state of the link remains SYSB   The facility fault has been located       DS30                     Carrier                           Tx Carrier Digital Carrier Carrier  Node channel cross  channel channel channel  bank connect bank   bank bank         i Loopback    Facility fault          Common procedures  None    Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure     Troubleshooting a facility fault    At your current location    1 Manually busy the link  This action causes the
4.              ERROR  pm num IS NOT INSERVICE    Meaning  The peripheral that is attached to the specified link  in the linkset  is not  inservice  The SEND command exits     Action  Assure that the peripheral is inservice or choose a different link  then retry  the SEND command        INVALID LINKSET NAME                         297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 69  SEND  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Response for the SEND command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  You entered a linkset name that is not datafilled in the C7LKSET table   The SEND command exits     Action  Verify the linkset name and retry the SEND command        INVALID NETWORK TYPE IN DPC          Meaning  You specified a network type other than ANSI  CCITT  or TTC  The SEND  command exits     Action  Change the network type of the message to one of the three valid network  types  then retry the SEND command                             MESSAGE NUMBER msg HAS NOT BEEN BUILT YET    Meaning  You attempted to send a message specifying a message number that has  not been built with the BUILD command  The SEND command exits     Action  Verify the message number and retry the SEND command     THE  lt liu gt  IS NOT IN USE BY C7TU          Meaning  The link interface unit  LIU  attached to the specified link is not in use by  C7TU  The SEND command exits     Action  Use the SELECT command to select the LIU  then retry the SEND  command              UN
5.              Meaning  You entered a message code that C7TU does not recognize  The  BUILD command exits     Action  Retry the BUILD command with a valid message code     MESSAGE 0 WAS BUILT SUCCESSFULLY                Meaning  The C7TU builds the message and stores it in the message table  with a message number     Action  None                         MESSAGE WAS NOT BUILT SUCCESSFULLY          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 19                      BUILD  end   Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2   Responses for the BUILD command  MAP output Meaning and action  Meaning  You entered an invalid message number  The BUILD command  exits   Action  Retry the BUILD command with a valid message number   MESSAGE 0 WAS NOT BUILT SUCCESSFULLY  Meaning  You entered the message input incorrectly  The BUILD command  exits   Action  Retry the BUILD command with a valid message input   Warning  Msg type has been overwritten  Meaning  The command executed and added the message to the match    table  The message code in the message body  entered after the  routing label  was overwritten with the entered hex bytes or default  data parameter entry  The default entry changes the value of each  data byte after the routing label to zero  up to the 16   byte limit for a  match table entry     Action  None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 20 C7TULINK directory commands    DISPLAY    Command    Directory    Function   
6.          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 71  STATUS  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the STATUS command          Responses     gt STATUS BRIEF                      MAP response   LIU7 FTA TRACING THROTTLE   201 4248 1000 ENABLE 20   Item Disp NI Nettype Dir Link Dist Msg SI HO H1  0 MON ALL ANSI BOTH LS001 1 EXT XXX ISUP XXX XXX    Explanation  The system displays selected links        The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses    Response for the STATUS command       TT  nu       MAP output    MSB7     lt msb_    LI   lt ii    ML   lt liu_       m    no gt     U7  no gt     IU  no gt   lt        EM DISP    disp    Meaning and action    eke C7TU LINK ENVIRONMENT         et          NODE TRACING MSGS NACK        lt node_no gt   lt trace_info gt   lt msg gt   lt nack gt     por    N    FTA TRACING    _no gt  _info gt     PORT FTA Tracing Throttle  t_no gt   lt fta_no gt   lt trace_info gt   lt throttle_no gt     ETW DIR ST DIST MSG SI HO HI  net dir st dist msg si hO hl       Meaning  The display includes links that currently are selected and a shortened  dump of the entries in the match table     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       13 1       13 C7UP directory commands       C7UP directory commands    Use the C7UP command to access the C7UP directory level  C7UP controls  the
7.         INITIATED                CODE   0028          C011    FOR CLOCKS TO SYNC     ING MAPPER CARD TESTS                      ED STATUS MESSAGE                   Note  The above display can take up to 2 min to complete     After the reset messages  futher information is displayed  depending on  whether the software load is successful        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 13    Troubleshooting a LIM unit  continued              14    Example of a MAP display if no software load is present           ESET CODE             FIR   C011    FORMAT 00A4 SOFT REINIT   NO S W VECTOR   six lines of register information   ISSUING SELF RESET                               Example of a MAP display if software load is present           SYSTEM IMAGE RELOAD       SOS RELOAD RESTART NO 1 AT       00 00 00 000  SO NODE  NODE SOS INITIALIZATION STARTED   MSO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  2  SO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  1  SO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  3  SO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  4  SO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  5   MSO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  13  SO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  12  SO NODE  NODE SUCCESS   RTIF USER LOGGED IN   91 11 27 03 37     TAS CAPTIVE BCS32CD        gt MSO NODE  NODE SERIAL REQUEST PASSED ON CARD  12  SO NODE    SUCCESS                                                                                                     
8.         Meaning  The command failed because the process pool could not be allocated   Action  Enter command DISABLE again     ERROR CREATING PARENT MAILBOX              Meaning  The command failed because mailboxes were not created     Action  Enter command DISABLE again        ERROR CREATING PREFERRED MAILBOX                       Meaning  The command failed because mailboxes were not created   Action  Enter command DISABLE again     Deactivation module not found     Meaning  The command failed because deactivation module C7SLSDCT is  missing   Action  Add module C7SLSDCT to the software load     Could not invoke deactivation process     Meaning  The command failed  The deactivation process could not be started for  an unspecified reason     Action  Enter command DISABLE again   Transition failed  8 bit SLS not deactivated     Meaning  The command failed  The deactivation process could not be started for  an unspecified reason     Action  Enter command DISABLE again    Transition got stuck  8 bit SLS still deactivated   Meaning  The transition was interrupted  but the deactivation was completed   Action  None  An audit cleans up any inconsistencies    Transition problems  8 bit SLS still deactivate     Meaning  The transition was interrupted  but the deactivation was completed              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    SLS8BIT directory commands 16 5  DISABLE  end        Command responses  Sheet 3 of 3     Responses for the DISABLE command       Action  None  An a
9.        Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes    C7TULINK directory commands 12 63    SELECT    SELECT    C7TULINK    Use the SELECT command to select a link interface unit  LIU  in order to  monitor messages  If the peripheral is not selected  CCS7 messages will not be  matched against the match table for that link  This command also can be used  to release a link that currently is selected     Varying the log throttle is a password protected function  If allowed  the  SELECT command can set the log throttle to between one and 60 logs for each  LIU  This log throttle can be changed when an LIU is selected or deselected     Only four entries are allowed in the match table at a time  If an attempt is made  to use the SELECT command when four entries already are in the match table   the command does not execute  You have to release a link that currently is  selected in order to execute this command     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 2        SELECT command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  SELECT ALL  LIU7 ALL  HLIU   num log_throt_set  ON  MSB7 ALL OFF  m_num  MLIU ALL  NUMBER  _ num port_number  Item Description          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 64 C7TULINK directory commands  SELECT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 2     SELECT command parameters and variables          Co
10.        Several elements can appear in the same column  When this condition occurs   select one element from that column  An exception to this rule occurs when  one of the elements is a default     ps_link NOFORCE  FORCE WAIT  selectone UNIT unit_no NOWAIT       Presentation of long command expansions   Some commands have many parameters and variables with very long  hierarchies  These commands require continuation the expansion row  When  this situation occurs  the horizontal lines of parameters and variables are  numbered  Numbered lines help the user to follow the command syntax from  one row to the next     COMMAND PARAMETER variable PARAMETER variable  1   PARAMETER variable PARAMETER  2     COMMAND PARAMETER variable PARAMETER  1    continued  variable PARAMETER variable  2     COMMAND  2  PARAMETER variable     continued        Indication of defaults   An underlined parameter indicates a default  If no parameter listed in a column  is entered  the system uses the default parameter  In the following example   parameters NOFORCE and WAIT indicate default actions that the system  takes  unless parameters FORCE and NOWAIT are entered     The default elements are described in the Description section that follows the  command expansion     ps_link NOFORCE  FORCE WAIT    unit_no NOWAIT          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    7 46 CCS7 network non menu commands    Description of parameters and variables  The  Parameters and variables  table lists 
11.       loop   around    THRL    TLRH    TLRH       Tracking software related troubles  Use software error reports  SWERR  and trap reports to track software related    troubles     Software error reports  SWERKRs list the software routines that ran before a software error occurred   They also list the address that called each routine and the address at which the  software error occurred     Trap reports    A trap report is produced when a procedure is running  but due to a problem is  trapped and cannot do anything  Trap reports include the routine name and    address        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       5 1       5 Troubleshooting chart       This chapter contains a troubleshooting chart of causes and recommended  actions for service affecting troubles     Table 5 1 provides troubleshooting instructions  The table has a description of  the problem in the first column  the possible causes of the problem in the  second column  and the recommended actions in the third column  Some  recommended actions point to the procedure in the  Advanced troubleshooting  procedures  chapter of this document     Table 5 1 CCS7 troubleshooting  Sheet 1 of 3     Problem Possible cause Perform the procedure       Excessive signal unit error rate Facility fault Troubleshooting a facility fault    Failure of a trouble locating and Activating a loopbackon Troubleshooting links and linksets    clearing procedure from the NT9X78BA card failed   Trouble Locating and Clearing   Procedures 
12.      Accessing the SLS8BIT directory  To access the SLS8BIT directory level  enter the following command from the  CI  command interpreter  level      gt SLS8BIT  and press the Enter key     SLS8BIT directory commands  The following commands are available at the SLS8BIT directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e DISABLE  e DISPL     ENABLE  e HELP     QUIT       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 2 SLS8BIT directory commands    DISABLE  Command   DISABLE  Directory   SLS8BIT  Function    Use the command DISABLE to deactivate 8   bit signaling link selector  SLS   load balancing     Usage notes    Set the state of SOC option TEL00009 to ON before you enter this command   Refer to the Software Optionality Control User Manual  297   8991 901 for  more information on how to change the state of an option     Ensure that the C7TU test tool is not in use when deactivating 8   bit SLS     Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the DISABLE command    gt DISABLE   MAP response    8 bit SLS deactivation transition completed     Explanation The command was successful  8   bit SLS is now inactive              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    SLS8BIT directory commands 16 3  DISABLE  continued        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 3        Responses for 
13.      sls This variable specifies the signaling link selector code of the test message  The valid  entry ranges are     e Oto 32 for ANSI messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages   e Oto 16 for CCITT messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages   e Oto 16 for TTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages    e OQ to 32 for JPN messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages     e Oto 16 for NTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages     TTC This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  Telecommunications Technical Committee           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 56 C7TULINK directory commands    MONITOR  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the MONITOR command        gt MON LINK Is000177 0 BOTH ANSI ALL snm DATA 02 06    where  1s000177  is the linkset name  0  is the signaling link number  BOTH  is the direction of the message  ANSI  is the network type  ALL  is the routing label  snm  is the message code  02 06    are the hex bytes added to the message body  MAP response   MON match entry setup successfully    Explanation  This command monitors the incoming and outgoing messages of link  Is000177 for SNM  data        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 3           Responses for the MONITOR command       MAP output Meaning and action       All 
14.     C7TFC2    C7TFC3    C7CNTRER    C7FRCRER    C7XTFA    C7XTFR    C7XTFP CCS182    Route availability C7ROUTE C7RTUNAU    C7TFP    C7FRCRER      Route availability C7ROUTE C7RTUNAU CCS154  Routeset availability C7RTESET C7RSCNGU CCS172             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    3 8 CCS7 network operational measurements    Table 3 2 CCS7 network priority OM registers  Sheet 5 of 5   Performance factor OM group Register Associated logs    SCCP routing C7SCCP C7MSGHDL CCS203  CCS204  C7MSGHD2    SCCP routing C7SCCP C7RTFALL CCS201 205  C7RTFNTA    C7RTFNTN  C7RTFNWCG  C7RTFNWF  C7RTFSSF  C7RTFSSC  C7RTFUEQ  C7SYNERR  C7MSGHDL  C7MSGHD2    CCS202  CCS204       OM thresholding    Maintenance Assistance Package  order code BASO00003 Generic  allows  operating company personnel to create a threshold level for individual OMs     The OMs to be monitored are entered in table OMTHRESH  The following  information is included in the table    e OM register name key   e enable trigger  Y or N    e alarm level  none  minor  major  critical    e event threshold  1 to 32 767    e time interval  1 to 32 767 min    Once the information is datafilled  when a specified threshold is reached within    the designated time  an alarm is generated under the EXT MAP header of the  MAP display     To find the source of the alarm  for example  OM or DRAM   you use the LIST  command at the EXT level of the MAP display     If the EXT alarm was caused by an OM threshold being 
15.     Error  While opening file     Meaning  A system error occurred  The C7TU was unable to open a file on the  specified device  The command stops execution  No messages will be  recorded     Action  Retry the command        Error while reading file header     Meaning  An error occurred when trying to read the file header of the specified  file  The command stops execution  The file will be closed     Action  None       Error while reading next record     Meaning  An error occurred when trying to read a C7TU log record from the  specified file  The command stops execution  The file will be closed     Action  None       TIME   lt time gt  C7TU TRACING ON C7TU TRACING OFF  lt pm gt   lt num gt     Meaning  This report is produced when a peripheral is selected or removed by  the user     Action  None             TIME   lt timestamp gt  INVALID MESSAGE INVALID MESSAGE TYPE  lt msgtype gt   lt hexbyte gt                       Meaning  This is the response to a message that the C7TU is unable to  interpret  The invalid message type and the complete message in hexadecimal  format follow the time stamp of the message     Action  None             297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes    The C7TUREC command does not provide display functions  use the C7TU  directory C7TUPRT command to display all messages in the file     C7TU directory commands 11 7    C7TUREC    C7TUREC    C7TU    Use the C7 TUREC command to specify whether to use the
16.     Monitors the performance and usage of the CCS7 international gateway signaling  connection control part  SCCP     Provides information on CCS7 high speed link ATM adaptation layer operations   Provides information on CCS7 high speed link ATM adaptation layer operations   Provides information on CCS7 high speed link digital carrier operations   Provides information on CCS7 high speed link ATM layer operations    Counts CCS7 link failures and recoveries   Provides information on calls and congestion for a CCS7 link   Monitors MSU traffic and performance for a CCS7 link    Provides information related to CCS7 MTP layer 3 events for high speed links only   These OMs are not pegged for MTP layer 2 based links     Describes the performance and use of a CCS7 linkset    Stores link peripheral processor  LPP  information for interframe and intraframe  traffic and message size on a Common Channel Signaling 7  CCS7  link  OM group  C7LPP can store message switch  MS   link peripheral processor  LPP   and  enhanced LPP  ELPP  information     Stores link peripheral processor  LPP  information related to message type on  Common Channel Signaling 7  CCS7  links     Counts MSUs that are discarded by a CCS7 message transfer part  MTP  of aCCS7  node    Describes the performance and use of CCS7 routes  Provides information on the performance and use of a CCS7 routeset  Provides information on the performance and use of the CCS7 SCCP    Measures the volume of traffic and failures on the cla
17.     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range for is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all signal  points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 intercepts all zones     This variable specifies the DPC exchange of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 intercepts all  exchanges     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all signal  points     This variable specifies the DPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 32 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 5 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    d_hvst    d_intlsgpt    d_intlzone    d_kvst    d_member    d_network    d_numarea    d_pc    d_region    dpc_areaunit    dpc_cluster       Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the DPC hauptvermittlungsstelle  tandem level switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 8     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all si
18.    e Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Preventive maintenance activities  Preventive maintenance activities are to prevent problems  These activities  include monitoring performance  performing preventive maintenance  and  solving problems that other maintenance documents do not discuss   For preventive maintenance activities  refer to the following documents   e Mantenance and Operations Manual  297 8991 500  e Maintenance Manager s Morning Report  297 1001 535  e SPMS Application Guide  297 1001 330    You will also need information from the following chapters   e CCS7 network logs   e CCS7 network operational measurements   e Trouble isolation and correction methods    Note  This guide also contains a description of CCS7 user interface  commands     CCS7 functional description  The following sections describe how a CCS7 network works     e CCS7 protocol  e CCS7 signaling messages  e Transaction capabilities application part  TCAP  messages  e Integrated services digital network user part  ISUP  messages  e CCS7 hardware architecture      Signaling links  SL       Routes  linksets and routesets    e Mapping CCS7 hardware to protocol    CCS7 protocol  The CCS7 protocol is the operating software of the CCS7 system  The protocol  consists of layers  These layers correspond to the levels of activity required to  support the interconnection and exchange of information between the users of  a communications system        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance s
19.    e NIU   Data transfer from LIU7s or MLIUs to the network   The LIU7s and MLIUs transfer data on the C bus  The NIU converts C bus  data into DS30 format and transfers it to the network using one to four DS30    links  Figure 1 12 shows a channelized access external interface configuration   Figure 1 13 shows a CCS7 channelized access system summary        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 24 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 12 Channelized access external interface configuration       Outside world  PCM  DTC j  Network plane 0    Network plane 1  LIU7 LIU7 ee ioh LIU7 LIU7  CBI e e  CBI rae a CBI e     CBI    C bus 0    C bus 1                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 25    Figure 1 13 CCS7 channelized access system summary             DMS core SLM             DMS bus                IOC       E                                                      LIM LIM Network  unit 0 uniti  LPP  LIUZ eee  NIU  ogg  LIU7 PDTC TM  OAU   unit O unit 1                               CCS7 links             Bus configuration  The NIUs and LIU7s or MLIUs share the frame transport bus  F bus  and the  C bus on each link interface shelf  LIS      The system duplicates F buses for reliability  An F bus is on all shelves in an  link peripheral processor  LPP   The LIU7s or MLIUs use the F bus for data  and maintenance messaging  The NIUs use the F bus for maintenance  messaging only     The system duplicates C buses for reliability  O
20.   Activating an offline Troubleshooting links and linksets  linkset failed    Downloading software Troubleshooting a LIM unit  to a LIM unit failed    Downloading software Troubleshooting an ASU  to a CCS7 link interface   unit  LIU7   multiple link   interface unit  MLIU     high speed link interface   unit  HLIV   or   high speed link router    HSLR  failed    Recovering a stuck Troubleshooting an ASU  LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or  HSLR failed             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       5 2 Troubleshooting chart    Table 5 1 CCS7 troubleshooting  Sheet 2 of 3     Problem    Failure of an alarm clearing  procedure in the Alarm and  Performance Monitoring  Procedures     Failure of a routine maintenance  procedure in the Routine  Maintenance Procedures     LIM unit not responding    Node inappropriately discarding  messages with no local or  network notification       Possible cause    Returning a link  interface module  LIM   unit to service failed    Starting a C7BERT test  failed    F bus problem    F bus taps problem  Link problem  LIM unit problem    LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or  HSLR problem    RTS LIM to MS links  failed    Route problem  Routeset problem    F bus problem    F bus taps problem  LIM unit problem  Link problem    LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or  HSLR problem    Returning LIM to MS  links to service failed    Message sink    Perform the procedure    Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Troubleshooting links and linksets    Troubleshooting F bus and F bus t
21.   LEN 84 MSG  09 LINK 5 SLC 0 CLLI TROOO0004  C7 SIO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  1 SERV IND  3  C7 LABEL  DPC   ANSI7 200 001 000 OPC   ANSI7 200 001 004 SLS  S7 DATA FOLLOWING ROUTING LABEL  09 00 03 09 OF 06 89 00 FE 08 30 26 05 C3 FE 04  01 C8 39 E2 37 C7 04 00 00 41 00 E8 2F E9 2D CF  01 00 DO 02 83 01 F2 24 AA OB 84 09 01 00 21 OA  08 30 26 21 43 84 09 02 00 21 OA 19 29 87 01 25  84 06 07 00 01 03 11 00 DF 45 01 17  RTC_STP C7TU102 JAN 16 21 28 27 3406 INFO OUTGOING LINK MSG  C7 HEADER  LEN 84 MSG  09 LINK 2 SLC 0 CLLI MG000001  Ci SLO    NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  1 SERV IND  3  C7 LABEL  DPC   ANSI7 200 002 001 OPC   ANSI7 200 001 000 SLS  S7 DATA FOLLOWING ROUTING LABEL  09 00 03 09 OF 06 C9 FE FE 08 30 26 05 C3 FE 04  01 C8 39 E2 37 C7 04 00 00 41 00 E8 2F E9 2D CF  01 00 DO 02 83 01 F2 24 AA OB 84 09 01 00 21 OA  08 30 26 21 43 84 09 02 00 21 0A 19 29 87 O01 25  84 06 07 00 01 03 11 00 DF 45 01 17  RTC_STP C7TU101 JAN 16 21 28 27 3507 INFO INCOMING LINK MSG  C7 HEADER  LEN 79 MSG  09 LINK 2 SLC 0 CLLI MG000001  C7 SIO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  1 SERV IND  3  C7 LABEL  DPC   ANSI7 200 001 004 OPC   ANSI7 200 002 001 SLS  S7 DATA FOLLOWING ROUTING LABEL  09 00 03 05 07 02 C1 FE 02 C1 FE 3B E4 39 C7 04  00 CO 41 00 E8 31 E9 2F CF 02 00 00 DO 02 04 01  F2 25 84 06 08 00 01 03 11 00 84 09 04 00 21 0A  19 39 26 10 65 DF 41 04 41 CI 20 C3 84 09 05 00  21 0A 07 54 55 34 12  RTC_STP C7TU102 JAN 16 21 28 27 3608 INFO INCOMING LINK MSG  C7 HEADER  LEN 79 MSG  09 LINK 5 SLC 0 CLLI TROOO0004  C
22.   LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt     Meaning  External routing is inactive  The digital trunk controllers  DTC   are routing ISUP messages to the link that is displayed     Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Buffering Msgs for     Route  lt routeset name gt  lt   gt  lt linkset name gt     Meaning  External routing is inactive  DTCs are routing ISUP messages   The messages are being stored in DTC  lt   gt  for route  lt routeset name gt      Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Buffering Msgs for     Link  lt linkset name gt  lt   gt   lt link state gt  LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt     Meaning  External routing is inactive  DTCs are routing ISUP messages   The messages are being stored in DTC lt   gt  for link  lt linkset name gt      Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       9 12 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Command responses  Sheet 2 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      DTC  lt   gt  Discarding Msgs  Unavail Routeset  lt routeset name gt     Meaning  External routing is inactive  Messages are being discarded due  to an unavailable routeset     Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      DTC  lt   
23.   MATCH  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the MATCH command       MAP output Meaning and action    ERROR  MATCH ENTRY 1 IS NOT IN USE             Meaning  Match entry 1 has not been assigned     Action  Assign the entry before attempting to alter or use it     Out of range   lt byte offset gt  0 TO 15     Enter   lt byte offset gt    lt data gt         Meaning  You entered the byte offset value incorrectly     Action  Reenter the command                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 47    MONITOR  Command  MONITOR  Directory  C7TU C7TULINK  Function    Use the MONITOR command to monitor incoming and outgoing CCS7  messages  To monitor specific CCS7 messages  make an entry in the match  table  To change an entry in the match table  use the REMOVE command to  remove the current entry  then enter the new entry using the MONITOR  command     Usage notes    The MONITOR command is qualified by the following exceptions   restrictions  and limitations     If the message code used in a MONITOR command string is not in the list  of valid message codes  the MONITOR command does not work  Use the  C7TU directory MSGCODE command to review a list of current  valid  message codes     Match entries are matched from the first entry in the match table  The  process stops when the search finds a valid match entry or if the search  does not produce a match  After the first acc
24.   and traps for any unusual events        Can not download MIP databases because there are greater than 108 links in  C7LINK and DTC datafilled in table LTCINV   Command WAS NOT Processed        Meaning  The command failed because there are more than 108 links in table  C7LINK and DTCs exist in table LTCINV     Action  Reduce the number of links to 108 or less  or remove DTCs from  table LTCINV  Enter the command again              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 12 C7RTR directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the HELP command to display a list of available commands in the C7RTR  directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples    The following table provides an example of the command     Command example                                                                                                             Example of the HELP command    gt HELP   MAP response    QUERY_EXT_ROUTING Query the state of External Routing  ACTIVATE Activate External Routing   REMOVE_MTP Remove MTP Databases from CCS7 DTCs  DOWNLOAD_MTP Download MTP Databases to CCS7 DTCs  DEACTIVATE Deactivate External Routing  QUERY_EXP_RTESETS Query Expanded Routesets  QUERY_MAX RTESETS Query maximum number of C7RTESET tuples  QUIT Exit C7RTR   HELP Display this information   Enter Q for more information   Explanation  C7RTR commands display                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000   
25.   is datafilled in table LTCINV  Routing tables  could not be downloaded     Action  Deactivate the 8 bit SLS Load Balancing option or remove the  PDTCs from table LTCINV before executing the  DOWNLOAD_MTP command again     Download of all the tables was not successful  Download the MTP tables again  and check for LOGs SWERs        Meaning  The command failed for an unspecified reason   Action  Repeat the command  Check for logs and software errors     The MTP databases are already downloaded to the CCS7 DTCs   Do you want to download them again  y n      Meaning  The MTP data is already downloaded     Action  Download the tables again  if any problems occurred during the  original download        There are currently more than  lt   gt  dtcs with optattr   CCS7  Please remove  the appropriate number of CCS7 DTCs  No action taken     Meaning  The number of DTCs supported during the MTP download is less  than the number of datafilled DTCs     Action  Remove DTCs from table LTCINV until the maximum number of  supported DTCs is equal to the number of datafilled DTCs              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7RTR directory commands 8 11  DOWNLOAD MIP  end        Command responses  Sheet 3 of 3     Responses for the DOWNLOAD_MTP command       MAP output Meaning and action    The MTP databases have not been downloaded successfully   Check for DDM logs and or attempt the download again     Meaning  The process was not successful     Action  Check logs  software errors
26.   test environment           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    7 48 CCS7 network non menu commands    Table 7 2 Directory description table    Directory    C7TULINK    C7UP  PROG    MTPCVRT    SLS8BIT       Description    The C7TULINK directory accesses commands for monitoring CCS7 messages   Links can be monitored as well  There are two versions of the C7TULINK  environment  The basic C7TULINK environment  C7 TULINK_PMT7  allows you  to access commands that monitor messages only  building  sending  or  intercepting messages is not allowed unless you provide a valid password when  accessing the C7TU MAP level  The password protected C7TULINK  environment  C7TULINK_ILPT7  allows the user to access the same basic  commands as well as commands used for building  sending  or intercepting  messages     The C7UP directory controls user part unavailable functionality     The program  PROG  directory contains the command program listing for the  command interpreter  Cl  level of the MAP  maintenance and administration  position      The MTPCVRT directory is used to convert the network to the new specified  point code  PC  format     The SLS8BIT directory controls the 8 bit signaling link selection  SLS  Load  Balancing optionality        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       8 1       8 C7RTR directory commands       C7RTR directory commands    Use the C7RTR CI  command interpreter  tool to perform different functions  on CCS7 link interface unit  LI
27.  2        Responses for the C7TUREC command    MAP output Meaning and action       C7TU RECORD STOP        Meaning  The file has been closed successfully by the C7TU  This message is  displayed in response to the QUERY command when the C7TU is not recording  to a file     Action  None       Error  Device is not valid     Meaning  You specified a device name that is not valid or is not recognized  The  command halts execution  No messages will be recorded     Action  Retry the command with a valid device name           Error  Unable to get file information     Meaning  You specified a file name that is not valid or is not recognized  The  command halts execution  No messages will be recorded     Action  Retry the command with a valid file name        Error  Unable to get volume information     Meaning  You specified a device name that is not valid or is not recognized  The  command halts execution  No messages will be recorded        Action  Retry the command with a valid device name           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TU directory commands 11 9  C7TUREC  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the C7TUREC command       MAP output Meaning and action       Error  While creating the file     Meaning  The system failed to create the specified file at the specified device   The command halts execution  No messages will be recorded     Action  Retry the command with a different device name   Recording already started     Meaning  This response 
28.  BERT is automatically stopped by the SETSTOP command     Generated hourly  containing operational measurements  OM  counts of signaling  unit  SU  errors  negative acknowledgements  and automatic changeovers received  for specified links that have exceeded the threshold value in the previous hour     A CCS link fails during a computing module restart        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 7    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 6 of 14     Log  CCS201    CCS202    CCS203    CCS204    CCS205    CCS206    CCS207    CCS208  CCS209  CCS210    CCS211  CCS212  CCS213  CCS214    CCS215    CCS216  CCS217  CCS218       Definition    A signaling connection control part  SCCP  message is received from the network  that is invalid and cannot be decoded     An SCCP message with an invalid called party address  CDPA  is received from the  network  and cannot be routed     An SCCP mesage is received from the network that has an invalid calling party  address  CGPA   An attempt to route the message is made     An SCCP message is received from the network that is destined for an unknown local  subsystem     An SCCP message is received from the network that requires global title translation   GTT  but the message contains a translation type for which the node has no  translation tables     An invalid SCCP message is received from a local subsystem  The message is  discarded     An SCCP management message  SCMG  that has invalid data is received by th
29.  C7RTR  Function    Use the QUERY_MAX_RTESETS command to display the maximum  number of tuples for table C7RTESET when external routing is activated     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the QUERY_MAX_RTESETS command        gt QUERY_MAX_RTESETS  MAP response           The maximum number of tuples in table C7RTESET when External Routing is  activated and MTP databases have been removed from CCS7 DTCs is 2047                       The maximum allowable number of tuples into table C7RTESET based on SOC usage  limit is 255                 To increase the number of tuples in table C7RTESET use SOC        Explanation  The maximum number of tuples displays  The maximum number of tuples for table  C7RTESET based on the SOC usage limit is 255  Use software optionality control  SOC  to increase  the maximum tuple limit  Refer to the Software Optionality Control User Manual  297    8991 901 for  more information on how to assign a usage limit to an option              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 20 C7RTR directory commands  QUERY_MAX_RTESETS  eno        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the QUERY_MAX_RTESETS command       MAP output Meaning and action    Undefined command   lt QUERY_MAX_RTESETS gt     Meaning  Command entered incorrectly        Action  R
30.  C7RTR directory commands 8 13  HELP  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the HELP command       MAP output Meaning and action                   QUERY_EXT_ROUTING Query the state of External Routing  CTIVATE Activate External Routing   EMOVE_MTP Remove MTP Databases from CCS7 DTCs  OWNLOAD_MTP Download MTP Databases to CCS7 DTCs  ACTIVATE Deactivate External Routing   ERY _EXP_RTESETS Query Expanded Routesets  RY_MAX _RTESETS Query maximum number of C7RTESET tuples  Exit C7RTR   Display this information                                                                               A  R  D  D  Q  Q  Q  H                Meaning  The C7RTR commands display     Action  None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 14 C7RTR directory commands    QUERY_EXT_ ROUTING    Command   QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command to determine if  e external routing is active or inactive    e CCS7 digital trunk controllers  DTCs  contain message transfer part   MTP  table information    e all CCS7 DTCs are data distribution manager  DDM  stable    Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables   Parameters and variables  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING Command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING LIST    Item Description          LIST This para
31.  CCS7 network logs 2 1  Logs 2 1       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    viii Contents    Log types 2 1  Log output 2 2  LOGUTIL 2 2  CCS7 network logs 2 2  Priority logs 2 15  Where to find log information 2 17       3    4    CCS7 network operational measurements    CCS7 network OM groups 3 1  CCS7 network priority OMs 3 4  OM thresholding 3 8   OM class assignment reports 3 9    Trouble isolation and correction methods    CCS7 network test tools 4 1  CCS7 test utility 4 1  CCS7 bit error rate test 4 17  Manual loopback tests 4 18  ISUP continuity testing 4 18  Tracking software related troubles 4 26  Software error reports 4 26  Trap reports 4 26    4 1       5    Troubleshooting chart       6    7    Advanced troubleshooting procedures    How to determine the cause of a failed link 6 2  Troubleshooting a facility fault 6 7  Troubleshooting a LIM unit 6 10  Troubleshooting a link that continually fails and recovers 6 15  Troubleshooting a message sink 6 18  Troublehshooting an ASU 6 21  Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps 6 23  Troubleshooting links and linksets 6 27  Troubleshooting remote point codes 6 30  Troubleshooting remote subsystems 6 33  Troubleshooting routes and routesets 6 37    CCS7 network non menu commands   Description of non menu commands 43   Command conventions used 43   Command example  table 43   Command parameters and variables  table 43  Description of parameters and variables 46  Conventions comparison 46   Directory
32.  DUP  _CALL_AND_CIRCUIT   e DUP_MAINTENANCE   e TUP_PLUS       Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    DEACT command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables   DEACT si   Item Description   si This variable indicates the service indicator on which UPU is to be activated  See    the Usage notes section in this document for a list of valid service indicators                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7UP directory commands 13 5  DEACT  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the DEACT command        gt DEACT SCCP   where   SCCP is the service indicator  MAP response     WARNING  Deactivating UPU functionality for SCCP    Explanation  Normal response for command DEACT  The command was successful  UPU  functionality is no longer active on the specified Sl              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the DEACT command       MAP output Meaning and action   lt SI gt  already has UPU deactivated    Meaning UPU functionality was not active on the specified SI when  command DEACT was entered     Action None  WARNING  Deactivating UPU functionality for  lt SI gt     Meaning The command was successful  UPU functionality is no longer  active on the specified SI     Action None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Mainte
33.  Databases are being downloaded   The procedure will be complete when the CCS7 DTC are stable        Explanation  The MTP database updates are being sent to the DTC routing databases              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 9  DOWNLOAD MTP  continued        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 3        Responses for the DOWNLOAD_MTP command       MAP output Meaning and action    DDM is in a transient state  Pleas nter the command when DDM is stable   Use the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command to determine if DDM is stable   No action taken                 Meaning  The DTC  LIU7  or routeset was in a transient state when this  command was invoked     Action  Check the logs to identify the transient component and use the  QUERY_EXT_ ROUTING command to check if DDM is stable        External Routing is required for SPMs   MTP DDM tables will not be downloaded to SPMs   Do you want to download DDM tables to DTCs        Meaning  If the switch has service peripheral modules  SPM   this question is  displayed to verify that the user understands that the CCS7 datafill  will not be downloaded to the SPMs and that external routing must  not be turned off     Action  Enter Y  yes  to download the DDM tables to DTCs           There ar xpanded routesets in the office  Use the C7RTR query_exp_rtesets  command to find which routesets must be deleted before the MTP databases can  be downloaded    No action 
34.  Do  resolved by the far end Step 24  not resolved by the far end Step 20    Cycle the links carrying the messages through the offline state     If the route Do  remians ISTb or SysB Step 21  is in service Step 24          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 41    Troubleshooting routes and routesets  end        21    22    23    24    25    26    Cycle the routeset through the offline state     If the route Do  remians in ISTb or SysB Step 22  is in service Step 24       The problem is likely a software problem   If you Do    have access to PROTEL soft  Step 23  ware listings       do not have access to PROTEL Step 25  software listings       At this point  you can continue by debugging the software  or else contact next  level of support     Monitor log buffers in all nodes  CM  MS  LIM  LIU  while testing for  indications of software problems  such as SWERRS and traps  Debug  software using the DEBUG utility and the PROTEL program listings     If the problem that led you to this procedure was a routeset problem   determine if there are any more ISTb or SysB routes in the routeset     If Do       more routes are ISTb or SysB Step 3  all routes are in sevice Step 26    For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support     You have completed this procedure        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    7 43    7 CCS7 network non menu commands          Description of non men
35.  HOU OLEH WEEE LIS 3 Filler anel  wnn    faunan ffonau  ppg     SLMO   SLM1 p  PULIO HOU OLEHE IEEE  DTE TME DSNE IOE DPCC LPP EMC       Integrated node    DMS tasks    An INode is a combined SSP and STP and it supports all the functions of an  SSP and an STP  The combination allows the use of a single site and a reduced  number of frames and cabinets  By integrating CCS7 elements into a single  node  operating companies can accrue cost savings that result from shared    equipment  reduced transmission facilities  and integrated operations   administration  and maintenance     The following subsections describe DMS STP   SP SSP  and INode tasks     Gateway screening    Gateway screening controls access to a CCS7 network and database by other  CCS7 networks  The system screens CCS7 messages as the messages enter a    DMS STP node  The screening process makes sure that only authorized       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000          Maintenance summary 1 21    network users access facilities and services  The screening process is as  follows     e CCS7 messages contain routing data  This data includes destination and  originating point codes  GTT numbers  and information that identifies the  service that the message accesses     e Operating companies can specify the services of its network which users  can access  To specify the services  operating companies set screening  standards in the MTP and SCCP protocol layers     e Gateway screening denies network access to traffic
36.  MAP levels normally accessed at the regular MAP terminals  are  not available at the RTIF        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 11    Troubleshooting a LIM unit  continued           CAUTION  Possible outage  Do not issue commands from an RTIF on an in service LIM  An    outage will occur if you try to do that     If the LIM is powered down  power it up  The hex display on the RTIF is frozen  but you can enter RTIF backslash commands  You do not have to take any  manual action regarding the jam status of the LIM unit since the system takes  care of it     At the MAP terminal  enter the PMRESET command     At the RTIF  watch for an out of band message  followed by a reset initiated  message  These messages should appear on the RTIF within 20 s from the  time you entered the PMRESET command        If the reset initiated message Do  appears Step 13  does not appear Step 5    Verify that the LIM unit resets locally  by entering a  RESET MS00 command  at the RTIF        If the LIM unit Do  resets Step 6  does not reset Step 12    Replace the NT9X17 and NT9X23 circuit cards in the LIM unit and the  message switch  MS      At the MAP terminal  enter the PMRESET command     On the RTIF  watch for an out of band message  followed by a reset initiated  message  These messages should appear on the RTIF within 20 s from the  time the PMRESET command is entered at the MAP     If the reset message Do    appears at the RTIF but not at Step 13 
37.  Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       6 10 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Application  Use this procedure to troubleshoot a failed link interface module  LIM  unit  that does not respond to basic maintenance procedures     Definition  This procedure explains how to troubleshoot a LIM unit using a remote  terminal interface  RTIF   If you do not have a portable RTIF with an EIA  cable  you can use the RTIF from the inactive computing module  CM  by  transferring the RTIF cable from the dual plane combined core  DPCC   cabinet to the link peripheral processor  LPP  cabinet     Common procedures  None    Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure     Troubleshooting a LIM unit    At your current location          1 Review the maintenance actions already taken  Repeat if necessary   If the LIM problem Do  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 17  2 Connect the RTIF to the LIM unit by plugging the RTIF cable into the lower    RS232 connector on the NT9X26 circuit card     e For LIM unit 0  the NT9X26 circuit card is on shelf 0  the top shelf  in slot  17R     e For LIM unit 1  the NT9X26 circuit card is on shelf 0  the top shelf  in slot  22R     Note  The RTIF banner shows MS 0 or MS 1  depending on which LIM  unit it is connected to  When a working or valid software load is present   Ai flashes and you can enter many Cl commands  such as DEBUG and  LOGUTIL  You can also enter normal RTIF backslash commands  MAPCI  and all
38.  Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    15 1       15 PROG directory commands       PROG directory commands  The PROG directory contains the command program listing for the command  interpreter  CI  system  All new command programs added to the DMS switch  appear in this directory     Accessing the PROG directory  When you perform login at the MAP terminal  you access the PROG directory  directly and all valid PROG level commands are available     PROG directory commands  The GWXREF command is available directly at the CI level        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    15 2 PROG directory commands    GWXREF  Command  GWXREF  Directory  PROG  CI level of the MAP   Function    Use the GWXREF command to display screening data from the signaling  transfer point  STP  Gateway Screening tables     Usage notes  The GWXREF command is available only for customers with the Gateway    Screening feature  It applies to STP and Integrated Node  INode    The screening references are defined in the following tables   e C7ALWOPC   e C7BLKOPC   e C7ALWSIO   e C7BLKSIO   e C7ALWDPC   e C7BLKDPC   e C7DESTFLD   e C7CGPA   e C7ALWGTT   e C7CDPA   e C7AFTPC       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    PROG directory commands 15 3    GWXREF  continued        Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       GWXREF command parameters and variables       Command    GWXREF    ltem  F
39.  Operational Measurements Reference Manual    e Translations Guide    Table 3 1 CCS7 network OM groups  Sheet 1 of 3        Group Description  ASUFBUS Monitors  transmit  and receive activity between the F buses and the application  specific unit  ASU      ASUMEMUT Monitors the use of data store and program store for an application specific unit   ASU      C7AUTOIM The C7AUTOIM OM group is associated with Auto Imaging on the DMS STP  The  Auto Imaging process monitors global title translation data changes on the LIU7   MLIU  or HLIU on an hourly basis  When the number of changes exceeds the  threshold set by the Auto Imaging process  an automatic dump initiates  Operating  company personnel can bypass the automatic dump process and perform manual  dumps on the LIU7  MLIU  or HLIU              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       3 2 CCS7 network operational measurements    Table 3 1 CCS7 network OM groups  Sheet 2 of 3     Group  C7GTLNK    C7GTWSCR    C7GWSCCP    C7HSLAL1  C7HSLAL2  C7HSLCAR  C7HSLATM  C7LINK1  C7LINK2  C7LINK3  C7LINK4    C7LKSET  C7LPP    C7LPP2    C7MTP    C7ROUTE  C7RTESET  C7SCCP  C7SCCPCO    Description    Captures operational information about global title translations  GTT  OMs uploaded  from the link  When the GTT OMs are uploaded  C7GTLNK places each OM in its  own register corresponding to the correct link     Counts messages discarded at a DMS STP by C7 gateway screening because they  were written by unauthorized users
40.  STP  B        Linkset Linkset   and routeset and routeset  One out of  two links fail       Failure logs  Failure logs   CCS101 Link failure No logs generated in other  CCS164 Link unavailable DMS 100 offices    PM and ISUP C7UP logs may follow  for STPs and SSPs                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 4 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    How to determine the cause of a failed link  continued     Logs generated when two out of two links fail    DMS STP DMS STP  B           Linkset  and routeset    Linkset  and routeset    Failure logs  Failure logs    CCS101 Link failures  two  one for CCS167 Route restricted  each failed link    CCS164 Link unavailable  two  one  for each failed link    CCS167 Route restricted   CCS175 Routeset restricted    PM and ISUP C7UP logs may follow for  STPs and SSPs          Common procedures  None    Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure     How to determine the cause of a failed link    At your current location    1 Review the maintenance actions already taken to date  Repeat if necessary   If the link problem Do  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 12          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 5    How to determine the cause of a failed link  continued        2 Determine if the failure has caused an end office toll trunk to be isolated  that  is  all links to the end office have failed        If an end office toll trunk Do  is isolated 
41.  Step 10  Step 9          297 8991 545 Standard    06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 29    Troubleshooting links and linksets  end        10    11    12    13    14    15    Perform the procedure Troubleshooting an ASU  in this chapter        If the link or linkset problem Do  still exists Step 10  no longer exists Step 15    Cycle the links through the offline state     If the link or linkset problem Do  still exists Step 11  no longer exists Step 15       Check for SWERRs  traps  and logs indicating a software problem        If a software problem Do  is indicated Step 12  is not indicated Step 14    The problem is likely a software problem        If you Do    have access to PROTEL soft  Step 13  ware listings    do not have access to PROTEL Step 14   software listings  Troubleshoot the software or contact the personnel responsible for the next  level of support     Monitor log buffers in the CM  MS  LIM  and link interface unit  LIU  and test  for indications of software problems  such as SWERRS and traps  Debug  software using the debug utility and the PROTEL program listings     For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support     You have completed this procedure        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 30 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting remote point codes    Application    Definition    Use this procedure to troubleshoot remote point code problems that do 
42.  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the OPC exchange of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all exchanges     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16     This variable specifies an OPC Hauptvermittlungsstelle  Tandem Level Switching  Exchange  for the CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 8     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format INTL   The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  The valid  entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all zones     This variable specifies an OPC Knotenvermittlungsstelle  Trunk Tandem Switching  Exchange  for the CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 16     This variable specifies the OPC member number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all members     This variable specifies the OPC network number
43.  Troubleshooting links and linksets    At your current location          1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary   If the link or linkset problem Do  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 15  2 Test the facilities with a C7BERT  Correct facilities problems using the How to    determining the cause of a failed link procedure in this chapter  When facility  faults are corrected  return to this point        3 Check the status of the facilities   If the link or linkset problem Do  still exists Step 4  no longer exists Step 15          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 28 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting links and linksets  continued     4    Verify all related datafill tables   e C7LKSET      C7LINK  e C7NETWRK  e C7RTESET       If the datafill is  correct  not correct  Correct the datafill   If the link or linkset problem  still exists    no longer exists    Do  Step 6  Step 5    Do  Step 6  Step 15       Verify the datafill tables at the node at the other end of the link           e C7LINK   e C7LKSET   e C7NETWRK   e C7RTESET  If the datafill is Do  correct Step 8  not correct Step 7   Correct the datafill   If the link or linkset problem Do  still exists Step 8  no longer exists Step 15    Reload the CCS7 link interface unit  LIU7   multiple link interface unit  MLIU    or high speed link interface unit  HLIU  and high speed link router  HSLR     and test it   If the test  passed    failed    Do 
44.  Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the SET command        gt SET SAR E800 ON   where   SAR is the functionality   E800 is the subystem name   ON is the state of the SAR functionality  MAP response     SUBSYSTEMSAR STATECRP STATE                   E800 ON OFF    Explanation The SAR functionality is enabled for subsystem E800              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the SET command    MAP output Meaning and action       SUBSYSTEM SAR STATE CRP STATE                   E800 ON OFF    Meaning  The SAR functionality is enabled for subsystem E800     Action  Subsystem E800 sends long messages        ERROR  Subsystem provided is not datafilled in table C7LOCSSN       Meaning  The subsystem is not datafilled in table C7LOCSSN     Action  Refer to table C7_LOCSSN to determine which subsystems are  datafilled on the node                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7SARCRP directory commands 10 7  SET  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the SET command       MAP output Meaning and action    Warning he TEL00009 option is currently idle  The state of SAR or    T  Warning CRP functionality of each subsystem may be set to  O  T       N  but this functionality will only be in effect after the  EL00009 option is on           Meaning  Operating company personnel can set the state of the SAR or CR
45.  Usage notes  None    DISPLAY    C7TU C7TULINK    Use the DISPLAY command to display recently built test messages  The  command displays messages for formats within the CCITT7 network     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       DISPLAY command parameters and variables       Command    DISPLAY    ltem  ALL    msg_num    VERBOSE       Parameters and variables    ALL VERBOSE    msg_num  Description  This parameter displays all C7TU test messages that exist in the message table     This variable specifies the number of the test message to be displayed  The  number ranges from 0 to 7     This parameter displays the complete C7TU message  including the internal  header           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 21  DISPLAY  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the DISPLAY command                                               gt DISPLAY ALL  MAP response   C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPC SLS  num type length ni pr si mem clu net mem clu net  O SLTM 9 Ze 385  22 001 001 001 002 002 002 0  C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPC SLS  num type length ni pr si mem clu net mem clu net  QO UDT 56 23    2 003 004 005 006 007 008 2  C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPC SLS  num type length ni pr si XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX  O INR 14 O 2 ISUP   default routing label                Explanation  The syst
46.  User Part Unavailable  UPU  functionality  UPU functionality impacts  service  Traffic on a UP will stop if UPU is enabled and the UP becomes  unavailable     Accessing the C7UP directory    To access the C7UP directory level  enter the following command from the CI   command interpreter  level      gt C7UP  and press the Enter key     C7UP directory commands    The following commands are available at the C7UP directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e ACT   e DEACT  e HELP   e QUIT   e STATUS       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    13 2 C7UP directory commands    ACT  Command   ACT  Directory   C7UP  Function    Use the ACT command to activate User Part Unavailable  UPU  functionality     Usage notes    UPU functionality impacts service  Refer to feature AU2377 before activating  UPU     Use this command on the following service indicators  SI      signaling connection control parts  SCCP    telephone user parts  TUP    integrated services digital network user parts  ISDN_UP   data user part  DUP _CALL_AND_CIRCUIT  DUP_MAINTENANCE   TUP_PLUS       Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    ACT command parameters and variables             Command Parameters and variables   ACT si   Item Description   si This variable indicates the service indicator on which UPU is to be activated  See       the Usage notes section in this document
47.  Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    14 4 MTPCVRT directory commands  CONVERT  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the CONVERT command       MAP output    Can not conv             Meaning and action    Meaning  You attempted to convert a network that is not in the CCITT format     Action  None       rt between the same PC format     Meaning  You attempted to convert to the point code format that the network was  already using  Command CONVERT fails     Action  Retry the command with a valid point code format     PC format conversion requested is not supported     Meaning  You attempted to convert to an invalid point code format  Command  CONVERT exits     Action  Retry the command with a valid point code format     Error has occurred with  lt table name gt  Table    Error occurred at tuple          Meaning  An error occurred at the specified tuple on the specified table  The system  exits the table and attempts to restore the network to its previous format  A serious  problem exists     Action  Contact your next level of support     ERROR  Could not convert  lt table_name gt  table back to original format  Manual  change required     Meaning  An error occurred when the system attempted to restore the network to  its original format  The table must be converted manually     Action  Contact your next level of support        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       MTPCVRT directory commands 14 5    DISPLAY  Command  DISPLAY  Directory  MTPCVRT  Function    Use t
48.  and the  C7TU match table     A user created message has been placed into the LIU or MSB7 on the CCS7 link     A user created message has been placed into the LIU or MSB7 to be sent out onto  the CCS7 link     A user created message has been placed into the LIU or MSB7 but has not been sent  out onto the CCS7 link     C7TU has received a message that can not be interpreted    This is a response to a destination point code  DPC  command    This is a response to the SELECT command when it is used to turn tracing on   This is a response to the SELECT command when it is used to turn tracing off     This log indicates that a periperal module is sending more than 10 log messages per  minute to the computing module  The number of messages not sent is indicated in the  log     No acknowledgement message is received from the far end office   An unreasonable message is received on a trunk   A CCS7 connection is released due to an abnormal condition     A blocked or unblocked circuit conditions        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       2 12 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 11 of 14     Log   C7UP104  C7UP105  C7UP106  C7UP107  C7UP108    C7UP109  C7UP110  C7UP111  C7UP112  C7UP113  C7UP114    C7UP115    C7UP116    C7UP117    C7UP120    C7UP121    C7UP123    C7UP300  DDM logs    DDM100       Definition   A circuit group blocking or unblocking conditions    An unsuccessful ISDN call attempt occurs    Problems occur because o
49.  and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       HELP command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables   HELP C7TULINK   Item Description   C7TULINK This parameter produces online documentation for the C7TULINK directory              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 25  HELP  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the HELP command        gt HELP C7TULINK                                                    MAP response   XxX KKAXAX XCTTU LINK PMT7 ENVIRONMENT            ASK  set three MASK bytes of an entry  ATCH  set the MATCH bytes of an entry  DUMP  display MATCH table in hex format  HELP  generate this text  ONitor  monitor messages at the ST interface  REMOVE  cancel an intercept monitor request or build  RESTORE  send the MATCH table entries to MSB  SELECT  select PMs and attributes  QUIT  exit C7TULINK environment  STATUS  display the status of the C7TULINK environment  Enter  Q  for more information           Explanation  You entered the C7TU directory  accessed the basic C7TULINK directory  and  performed a help query        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses    Responses for the HELP command       MAP output Meaning and action             MODULE NOT LOADED OR N          T       EDS OTHER CI INCREMENT TO BE BUILT    
50.  between the    computing module and a peripheral module                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    CCS7 network logs 2 3    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 2 of 14     Log  AUDT613    AUDT614    AUDT615    AUDT616    AUDT617    AUDT618    AUDT620    AUDT622    AUDT623    AUDT624    AUDT626    AUDT628    CCS logs  CCS101    CCS102    CCS103       Definition    An audit discovers a mismatch in the linkset availability states between the computing  module and a peripheral module     A CCS audit discovers a mismatch in the routeset availability states between the  computing module and a peripheral module     A CCS audit discovers a mismatch in the route availability states between the  computing module and a peripheral module     An audit discovers a mismatch in the link synchronization  Sync  states between the  computing module and the signaling terminal  ST      An audit reports CM linkset SLS data error detection and data mismatches between  the CM and LIU linkset SLS data     An audit reports CM combined linkset SLS data error detection and correction and  data mismatches between the CM and LIU combined linkset SLS data     An audit discovers a mismatch in the link discard levels between the computing  module and the signaling terminal  ST      A CCS audit discovers a mismatch between the link discard levels of the computing  module and a peripheral module     A CCS audit discovers a mismatch in routeset congestion levels between the  computing m
51.  by the STP Step 13  are not being sent by the STP Step 20    Use C7TU to determine if response messages  TFx  are being sent by the far  end DMS SP SSP DMS SCP        If TFx messages are Do  being sent Step 17  not being sent Step 14    Verify that the test messages are properly coded with such codes as the  OPC  DPC  network indicator  and concerned point code        If the messages are Do  properly coded Step 22  miscoded Step 15       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 40 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting routes and routesets  continued     15    16    17    18    19    20    Reverify the datafill in the MTP tables  because this datafill determines the  coding of the test messages        If the route Do  remains ISTb or SysB Step 22  is in service Step 24    Notify the personnel responsible for maintenance of the far end DMS SP SSP  DMS SCP of the problem        If the route Do  remains in ISTb or SysB Step 23  is in service Step 24    Responses to test messages are present  The DMS   STP switch is required  to update the route to match the TFx from the far end DMS SP SSP  DMS SCP        If the STP is Do  updating the route Step 20  not updating the route Step 18    Verify the coding of the TFx message        If the message Do  is coded correctly Step 20  is not coded correctly Step 19    Notify personnel responsible for maintenance of the far end to rectify the  improper coding of the TFx message        If the problem was
52.  command to enable the C7TU in the peripheral module  that is to be used        WARNING  MSG TYPE HAS BEEN OVERWRITTEN                      Meaning  The command executed  The message body that comes after the routing  label has been overwritten with the entries or default for the data parameter  The  default entry zero fills all data bytes after the routing label up to the truncating limit  of 16 bytes for a match entry     Action  None             297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes  None    C7TULINK directory commands 12 41    MASK    MASK    C7TU C7TULINK    Use the MASK command to specify bytes to be masked in the mask array of  the match table  The system disregards masked bytes when screening  incoming messages to be monitored or intercepted  Previously  the entire 16  bytes of a mask entry had to be specified in order to change one byte in the  mask array  This command allows you to specify the first byte in which to enter  data     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       MASK command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables  MASK item_no byte_offset data  Item Description    byte_offset    data    item_no       This variable specifies the first byte in which to enter data  The valid entry range  is 0 to 15     This variable specifies the data to be placed in the array  Separate each data byte  wit
53.  descriptions 47    43       8    C7RTR directory commands  C7RTR directory commands 8 1    8 1       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Contents ix    Accessing the C7RTR directory 8 1    C7RTR directory commands 8 1  ACTIVATE 8 2  DEACTIVATE 8 5  DOWNLOAD_MTP_ 8 8  HELP 8 12  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING 8 14  QUERY_EXP_RTESETS 8 17  QUERY_MAX_RTESETS 8 19  QUIT 8 21  REMOVE_MTP_ 8 22       9 C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 1  C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 1  Accessing the C7RTRQRY directory 9 1  C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 1  HELP 9 2  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING 9 4  QUIT 9 7  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING 9 8    10 C7SARCRP directory commands 10 1  C7SARCRP directory commands 10 1  Accessing the C7SARCRP directory 10 1  C7SARCRP directory commands 10 1  HELP 10 2  QUIT 10 4  SET 10 5  STATUS 10 8       11 C7TU directory commands 11 1   C7TU directory commands 11 1  Accessing the C7TU directory 11 1  C7TU directory commands 11 1   C7TULINK 11 2   C7TUPRT 11 4   C7TUREC 11 7   DPC 11 10   HELP 11 13   MSGCODE 11 15   QUIT 11 17       12 C7TULINK directory commands 12 1  C7TULINK directory commands 12 1  Accessing the C7TULINK directory 12 1  Accessing the password protected C7TULINK monitoring  environment 12 1  C7TULINK directory commands 12 3  ALTER 12 4  BUILD 12 10       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    x Contents   DISPLAY 12 20  DUMP 12 22  HELP 12 24  INTERCEPT  MASK 12 41  MATCH 12 44  MONITOR 12 47  QUIT 12 59  REMOVE 12 61  SELECT 12 63  SEND 12 67  STATUS 12 7
54.  end office to continuously send  Status indication   processor outage  SIPO  messages on the link  At the  C7LKSET level of the MAP display  you can detect receipt of SIPO messages  when the sync state of the link changes from system busy  SYSB  to remote  processor outage  RPO      2 Isolate the faulty section of the link by placing loopbacks in the facility  Place  the loopback as close to the end office you are working from as possible        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 9    Troubleshooting a facility fault  end           3 Determine the state of the link   If the synchronization state Do  changes from SysB to RPO Step 4  remians SysB Step 5  4 The facility is good up to the loopback  Move the loopback one step further    away from the end office and repeat Section 3 on page  9     5 You have located the facility fault  Clear or bypass the fault  then return the  link to service     CAUTION   Possible congestion on the link   If you do not deactivate the link before returning it to service  and a  loopback is in place  you can cause congestion on the link  The link  becomes flooded with messages  By deactivating the link and running  a signaling link test  you ensure that the link is not returned to service  with a loopback in place              To ensure a signaling link test is run  first deactivate the link and then return  it to service and activate it     7 You have completed this procedure        DMS 100 Family CCS7
55.  for a list of valid service indicators           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7UP directory commands 13 3  ACT  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the ACT command        gt ACT SCCP   where   SCCP is the service indicator  MAP response     WARNING  Activating UPU functionality for SCCP    Explanation Normal response for command ACT  The command was successful  UPU functionality  is active on the specified SI              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the ACT command    MAP output Meaning and action        lt SI gt  already has UPU activated    Meaning UPU is active on the specified SI     Action None  WARNING  Activating UPU functionality for  lt SI gt     Meaning The command was successful  UPU functionality is active on the  specified Sl     Action None                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    13 4 C7UP directory commands    DEACT  Command   DEACT  Directory   C7UP  Function    Use the DEACT command to deactivate User Part Unavailable  UPU   functionality     Usage notes  UPU functionality impacts service  Refer to feature AU2377 before    deactivating UPU    Use this command on the following service indicators  SI     e signaling connection control parts  SCCP    e telephone user parts  TUP    e integrated services digital network user parts ISDN_UP   e data user part 
56.  from the match table    MESSAGE This parameter removes an entry from the message table    number This variable is the number of the entry to be removed  The valid entry value is  0 to 7                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 62 C7TULINK directory commands  REMOVE  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the REMOVE command        gt REMOVE MATCH 7  where    7  is the entry number    MAP response    gt     Explanation  The command was successful  Entry 7 has been removed        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses          Response for the REMOVE command       MAP output Meaning and action  Item number  lt num gt  is currently not defined in the match table    Meaning  You entered a match entry number not yet built using the MONITOR or  INTERCEPT commands  The command does not execute     Action  Validate the match entry number and reissue the command   Message number  lt num gt  has not been built yet    Meaning  You entered a message number not yet built using the BUILD command   The command does not execute     Action  Validate the message number and reissue the command              Must specify Entry Number or ALL for REMOVE       Meaning  You entered an invalid value  The command does not execute     Action  Reenter the command with a valid entry number or all              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000
57.  is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the OPC exchange of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all exchanges     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 16 C7TULINK directory commands    BUILD  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 6 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables          O_group    o_hvst    o_intlsgpt    o_intlzone    o_kvst    oO _ member    o_network    o_numarea    o_pc    o_region    opc_areaunit    opc_cluster    This variable specifies the OPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16     This variable specifies an OPC hauptvermittlungsstelle  tandem level switching  exchange  for the CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from  0 to 8     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format INTL   The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  
58.  log system to  display messages as they occur  or to send all messages from the peripheral  modules  PM  to a file  It is more effecient to send a large number of messages  to a file rather than to flood the log system     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    C7TUREC command parameters and variables       device_name    file_name    QUERY  START    STOP       Command Parameters and variables  QUERY  START device_name file_name  C7TUREC STOP  Item Description    This variable specifies the name of the device where the CCS7 messages will be  stored     This variable specifies the name of the file where the CCS7 messages will be  stored     This parameter queries the active recording device and file     This parameter starts recording the CCS7 messages on a specified device and  file     This parameter stops recording the CCS7 messages on the specified device and  file           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 8 C7TU directory commands    C7TUREC  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides examples of the command     Command example       Example of the C7TUREC command        gt C7TUREC QUERY  MAP response           C7TU RECORD ONTO SFDEV TEMPFILE                Explanation  The active recording device and file are identified              MAP responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of
59.  match  After the first acceptable match  the rest of the  entries are not evaluated for a match  Ensure that your match entries are not  screened by another user s entry     e To select LIUs in order to intercept on their associated links  use the  SELECT command  To remove selected LIUs  use the REMOVE  command        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 27  INTERCEPT  continued        Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 28 C7TULINK directory commands  INTERCEPT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables    INTERCEPT ALL direction    LINK Iset_names link_code       ANSI ALL  1   LABEL netwk_indicator  2    CCITT ALL  3   LABEL netwk_indicator  4    TTC ALL  5   LABEL netwk_indicator  6    JPN ALL  7   LABEL netwk_indicator  8    NTC ALL  9     LABEL netwk_indicator  10        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 29  INTERCEPT  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    INTERCEPT     continued        Parameters and variables     1     2  priority dpc_mem dpc_cluster doc_netwk opc_mem opc_cluster  2     3   3     4  priority BASIC d_pc  4   INTL d_intlzone d_areantw d_intlsgpt     1     AUSTRIA d_
60.  message is received from the  network     An invalid traffic mix information  TFMI  message is received from the network     The SCCP fails to route a message in a link interface unit  LIU   This log is subject to  thresholding  Each LIU routing failure generates a maximum of nlogs in a 1 min  period  If more than nrouting failures occur in a 1 min period  no additional CCS2241  logs are generated  Instead  a CCS243 log is generated at the end of the 1 min  period  Currently  nis set to 20     The local SCCP susystem attemps to format a global title  GT  in the called party  address of a message it is about to transmit  and  SCCP determines if the interanl  global title translation  GTT  name  GTTNAME  used by the subsystem is not  datafilled in the GTTID field in table C7GTTYPE     Excessive SCCP routing failures occur in the LIU peripheral module  Normal routing  failures are reported in CCS241 logs  However  when the number of routing failures  during a 1 min period exceeds a threshold  currently 20   CCS241 logs are no longer  generated to prevent overloading of the log system  Instead  routing failures are  counted and reported at 1 min intervals in CCS243 logs  The difference between the  routing failures value and the failures not logged value in CCS243 is the threshold  value  currently 20   A threshold quantity of CCS241 logs  currently 20  is always  generated before a CCS243 log is created     Table C7LOCSSN has not been datafilled for a local subsystem that is tr
61.  message table  use the BUILD command    e To remove an entry from the message table  use the REMOVE command    e To display the current entries in the message table  use the DISPLAY  command     Figure 4 10 shows an example of building and displaying a message     Note  For ANSI ISUP messages  you are prompted to specify every bit in  the message you are building  It is easier to build a simple message like an  RSC  which has no message body  then use the ALTER command to change  the message type byte  Refer to  Altering the CCS7 messages you build   section in this chapter     Figure 4 10 shows a message being built and then displayed  The BUILD  command specifies entry 1 in the message table  It is for network type ANSI   with a default routing label  and RSC message type  and trunk CIC 600     Figure 4 10 Example of building and displaying messages        gt BUILD 0 ANSI DEFAULT RSC PARMS 600     gt DISPLAY 0   MAP display   C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC PC 233   NUM TYPE LENGTH NI PR SI XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX      0     RSC 14 O 2 ISUP     DEFAULT ROUTING LABEL        MESSAGE BYTES   Os cde  2  13h edn G CIM e E AON LO LT TA 13  AS  Gr 28  08 00 FD 04 FD FD 25 00 90 00 F4 01 12  No user defined DISPLAY PRINT procedure provided                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 15    Altering the CCS7 messages you build   Alter messages in the message table using the ALTER command  The old  message is overwritten by the altered ver
62.  o_region o_group o_member    3     4  sls    5     6  opc_areaunit sls    7     8  opc_areaunit sls    9     10  opc_subarea sls    continued     1  msg_code DATA hex_bytes    2  PARMS    end   Description    This parameter specifies that the message to be monitored is network type  American National Standards Institute  ANSI      This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies that the message to be monitored is network type CCITT   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter indicates that new hex data is specified  If the DATA parameter is  used  enter the necessary hex bytes  The message code may be one or two bytes  long and does not necessarily follow the routing label immediately     This parameter specifies a default routing label           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 13  BUILD  continued           Parameters and variables  Sheet 3 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables       d_areantw    d_austsgpt    d_austzone    d_chnsgpt    d_chnzone    d_exchange    d_gersgpt    d_group    d_hvst    d_intlsgpt    d_intlzone    d_kvst    d_member    d_network    This variable specifies the destination point code  DPC  area network of the CCITT  message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256  monitors all area networks     This variable specifies the DP
63.  of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all networks     This variable specifies the OPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 54 C7TULINK directory commands  MONITOR  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 7 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables          Command Parameters and variables   oO _pc This variable specifies the OPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The valid  entry range is 0 to 16384    o_region This variable specifies the OPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA or    opc_areaunit    INTL2  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all  regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all regions     This variable specifies the OPC area unit number of the TTC or JPN message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all area units     opc_cluster This variable specifies the OPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all clusters    opc_ This variable specifies the OPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC   mainarea message  The valid entry ranges are   e Oto 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers   e Oto 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers   e Oto 256 for N
64.  of the same document is 02 01     The second two digits indicate the issue  The issue number increases each time  the document is revised but rereleased in the same software release cycle  For  example  the second release of a document in the same software release cycle  is 01 02     To determine which version of this document applies to the software in your  office and how documentation for your product is organized  check the release  information in Product Documentation Directory  297 8991 001     References in this document  The following documents are referred to in this document     e Alarm and Performance Monitoring Procedures  297 xxxx 543  e Card Replacement Procedures  297 xxxx 547   e Log Report Reference Manual  297 xxxx 840   e Maintenance and Operations Manual  297 8991 500   e Maintenance Managers Morning Report  297 1001 535   e Operational Measurements Reference Manual  297 xxxx 814   e Provisioning Manual  PLN 8991 104       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    xii About this document    e Recovery Procedures  297 xxxx 545   e Routine Maintenance Procedures  297 xxxx 546   e Software Optionality Control User Manual  297 8991 901  e SPMS Application Guide  297 1001 330   e Translations Guide  97 xxxx 350   e Trouble Locating and Clearing Procedures  297 xxxx 544    e Engineering  and Administration System  SEAS  Reference Guide   297 8121 020    e Provisioning Manual  297 1001 450    Note  The document layer number  xxxx  denotes the
65.  product computing  module load  PCL      What precautionary messages mean    The types of precautionary messages used in NT documents include attention  boxes and danger  warning  and caution messages     An attention box identifies information that is necessary for the proper  performance of a procedure or task or the correct interpretation of information  or data  Danger  warning  and caution messages indicate possible risks     Examples of the precautionary messages follow     ATTENTION    Information needed to perform a task    ATTENTION  If the unused DS 3 ports are not deprovisioned before a DS 1 VT  Mapper is installed  the DS 1 traffic will not be carried through the  DS 1 VT Mapper  even though the DS 1 VT Mapper is properly  provisioned              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    DANGER    About this document xiii    Possibility of personal injury             DANGER   Risk of electrocution   Do not open the front panel of the inverter unless fuses F1   F2  and F3 have been removed  The inverter contains  high voltage lines  Until the fuses are removed  the  high voltage lines are active  and you risk being  electrocuted           WARNING    Possibility of equipment damage             CAUTION    DANGER   Damage to the backplane connector pins   Align the card before seating it  to avoid bending the  backplane connector pins  Use light thumb pressure to  align the card with the connectors  Next  use the levers on  the card to seat the card into the connecto
66.  resides in the tool supervisor  TOOLSUP   The  tool supervisor also provides a history of when the tool was used     To access the password protected commands in the C7TULINK level  enter  the following commands from the CI level      gt TOOLSUP  and press the Enter key      gt date       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 2 C7TULINK directory commands  and press the Enter key     where    date  represents day date month year time     gt ACCESS ON C7TU_ILPT7  and press the Enter key    gt valid_password   and press the Enter key     where    valid_password  represents a valid password    Note  If a valid password is entered  the system provides access and  displays these messages     C7TU_ILPT7 permitted  C7TU_ILPT7 access will expire 48 hours from now    xx WARNING     You have permitted access to command s  that require  skilled and knowledgable users  Proper use is required  to avoid possible service degradations  Please ensure  that only fully trained and qualified personnel proceed               gt C7TU  MAP response       TLPT7   INTEGRATED LINK PROTOCOL TEST TOOL                   ILPT7 allows messages to be monitored or intercepted  on a CCS7 signaling link  In addition  messages may be  sent in or out on a CCS7 signaling link        WARNING    WARNING    WARNING       C7TU should only be used under the strict supervision of TAS or  TELCO personnel who completely understand the ramifications of  using C7TU on a switch carrying traffic  I
67.  subsystems that do not respond to  procedures in other DMS STP maintenance documents     Definition  Remote subsystems are the signaling connection control part  SCCP  view of  the availability of subsystems  such as 800Plus and ACCS  at signaling end  points  end offices or databases or both      Remote subsystems are associated with remote point codes  and routing must  be available to the remote point code before routing can be applied to a remote  subsystem  In addition  test messages are used to verify routing availability to  a remote subsystem     Common procedures  None    Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure     Troubleshooting remote subsystems    At your current location          1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary   If the remote subsystem prob  Do  lem  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 18  2 Verify datafill in table C7NETSSN to ensure that the remote subsystem  number is datafilled correctly   If the datafill is Do  correct Step 4  not correct Step 3       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 34 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting remote subsystems  continued           3 Correct the datafill   If the remote subsystem prob  Do  lem  still exists Step 4  no longer exists Step 18  4 Determine if the subsystem is available at the far end   If the subsystem is Do  available Step 5  not available Step 13  5 Use C7TU to determine if subsystem test  SST  messages are being s
68.  terminator extender  paddle board paddle board paddle board paddle board  NT9X79 NTEX20BA NTEX20AA NT9X79    F bus F bus  repeater repeater  NT9X74 NT9X74    Integrated   E Integrated E  processor  amp  processor  amp     F bus interface F bus interface  NTEX22 NTEX22    Interface Signaling Ethernet Ethernet  paddle board terminal paddle board interface  NT9X77 or NT9X76 NT9X85 card  NT9X78 NT9X84       Signaling Ethernet  link LAN                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 24 Advanced troubleshooting procedures  Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps  continued     Organization of a four slot DLIU       To LIM unit 0 To LIM unit 1       F bus extender F bus terminator F bus terminator F bus extender  paddle board paddle board paddle board paddle board  NT9X79 NTEX20BA NTEX20AA NT9X79    F bus repeater F bus repeater  NT9X74 NT9X74       Integrated processor Integrated processor Integrated processor  and F bus interface and F bus interface and F bus interface  NTEX22 NTEX22 NTEX22    High speed Ethernet  signaling terminal interface card  NTEX76 NT9X84    DS 1 interface Ethernet  paddle board paddle board  NTEX78 NT9X85                STP  31781    High speed signaling link Ethernet LAN             Note  A dual link interface unit  DLIU  is a set of high speed link  HSL   termination hardware  Each set consists of a high speed link interface unit   HLIU  and high speed link router  HSLR         297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Adv
69.  that originates from  non authorized sources  Gateway screening denies access to traffic that  attempts to use services that are not leased     Global title translation  GTT translates an application specific address  such as a dialed 800 number   into the CCS7 network address required to complete the call     The CCS7 link interface unit  LIU7   the high speed link router  HSLR   or the  multiple link interface unit  MLIU  performs GTT  GTT does not impose a  processing load on the computing module  CM   Each LIU7  MLIU  or HSLR  processor can handle GTT on all messages received on a SL  As a result  the  system can apply GTT with minimal impact on DMS STP cross delay     Automated system maintenance  System software automatically initiates the following automated system  maintenance functions     Trunk audits  When trunk audits detect a mismatch  the log system reports it  Maintenance  personnel realign associated data or trunk state information     Circuit query audits   Every 24 h  the system software uses circuit query messages to perform an  audit on the trunk states  The circuit query messages check to see if the remote  state is compatible with the local state     The system software can query up to 32 circuits at one time  The audit begins  at 2 00 a m   unless you change the start time  To change the audit time  refer  to instructions for the CIRCUIT_QUERY_AUDIT_START_TIME parameter   You must datafill table TRKSGRP in order for the system to perform this audit   F
70.  the C7SARCRP directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response   CIs     gt        Explanation  You have exited out of the C7SARCRP directory           Responses  None       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7SARCRP directory commands 10 5    SET  Command  SET  Directory  C7SARCRP  Function    Use the SET command to enable or disable the state of the segmentation and  reassembly  SAR  or circular routing prevention  CRP  functionalities  The  state of the functionalities can be set on each subsystem or all local  subsystems     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    SET command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables       SET functionality subsystem_name state       Item Description  functionality This variable specifies the functionality  The range of values is SAR or CRP   state This variable specifies the state of the SAR or CRP functionality  The range of    values is ON or OFF     subsystem_name _ This variable specifies the subystem  Operating company personnel can  specify one subsystem name or all local subsystems              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    10 6 C7SARCRP directory commands    SET  continued    
71.  the MAP display    does not appear Step 8    Verify the DS30 cable connections between the LIM unit and the MSs  Also  verify the cross link connections  Do not rely on cable tags  Verify the  connections against table LIMPTINV        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       6 12 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting a LIM unit  continued     9    10    11    12    13    At the MAP terminal  enter the PMRESET command     At the RTIF  watch for an out of band message  followed by a reset initiated  message  These messages should appear on the RTIF within 20 s from the  time you entered the PMRESET command     If the reset message Do  appears Step 13  does not appear Step 10       Test the continuity of the connectors  At the MAP  enter the PMRESET  command     On the RTIF  watch for an out of band message  followed by a reset initiated  message  These messages should appear on the RTIF within 20 s from the  time the PMRESET command is entered at the MAP terminal     Go to Step 13     Simultaneously replace the NT9X13 and NT9X26 cards in the LIM unit with  spare cards     Try to reset the LIM unit locally again with the  RESET MS00 command at the  RTIF        If the LIM unit Do  resets Step 13  does not reset Step 15    Try to load the LIM software  Enter the PMRESET command at the MAP  terminal  The following sequence of messages appears at the RTIF     Example of a MAP display     UT OF BAND PLANE 1  ESET PLEASE CONFIRM   Y           
72.  the external routing status     Action  None       External Routing  lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find data for link  lt index   gt      Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing  lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find linkset and slc for link  lt index   gt      Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find linkset name for linkset  lt index  gt            DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       9 20 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Command responses  Sheet 10 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing  lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Link  lt index  gt  is not datafilled     Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path     SLS  lt   gt         Error  Link  lt index  gt  is an MSB based link     Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt ext
73.  the network indicator of the message  The valid entries  are as follows     e INTL     INTLSP  e NATL   e NATLSP    This variable specifies the starting offset of the CCS7 message bytes to be  altered  The valid entry range is 0 to 256     This variable specifies the OPC cluster number of the message to alter  The valid  entry range is 0 to 255   Entering 0 alters all clusters      This variable specifies the OPC member number of the ANSI routing message to  alter  The valid entry range is 0 to 255   Entering 0 alters all members      This variable specifies the OPC area network of the message to alter  The valid  entry range is 0 to 255   Entering 0 alters all area networks      This parameter changes the specified message in readable format     This variable specifies the CCS7 priority to alter  The valid entry range is 0 to 4   Entering 4 indicates a priority of all        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 7  ALTER  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 3 of 3     ALTER command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables    prompt_ans This variable represents the system action when the parms parameter is used to  alter the message in readable format  The system produces the current value of  valid parameters and prompts only for parameters that are valid for the message  you want to alter  When you complete the changes  enter the word  done  to  signal completion  The message is updated when the new v
74.  the signaling set  for example  LKS_TO_A  e the link that is in service for that linkset  for example  LKS_TO_A1  e the direction of the message  for example  incoming    Figure 4 12 shows the SEND command being used to send entry 0 from the  message table as an incoming message     Figure 4 12 Example of the SEND command           gt SEND 0 INLKS TO B1          Setting the C7TU log throttle threshold   C7TU has a throttling mechanism that prevents large numbers of C7TU log  messages from being sent from any single link to the CM  This prevents  congestion due to unintentional C7TU overloading     If you have access to C7TULINK_ILPT7  use the SELECT command to set a  threshold between 1 and 60 messages a minute when selecting an LIU  The  default is 10 messages per minute     Figure 4 13 shows the SELECT command being used to set a threshold of 30  messages per minute on LIU 101     Figure 4 13 Example of the SELECT command        gt SELECT LIU7 101 ON 30          The threshold returns to the default for all selected LIUs when the last user of  the C7TU quits     To display the current threshold setting for an LIU  use the STATUS command     CAUTION   Possible loss of service   Do not set the log throttle threshold above the default of 10  on links with high CCS7 traffic loads as unexpected  message loss may occur                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 17    CCS7 bit error rate test  Use C7BERT during fault isolati
75.  to specific users     In addition  there is a user definable log throttle threshold that prevents large  numbers of C7TU log messages from being sent from a single link to a  computing module  CM      C7TU commands    Table 4 1 lists and describes C7TU commands     Table 4 1 C7TU commands       Command  C7TULINK  C7TUPRT  C7TUREC    DPC    HELP    MSGCODE    QUIT       Description  Accesses message monitoring commands  Displays C7TU reports recorded on a device by C7 TUREC    Records C7TU reports from peripheral modules  PM  to a  device    Queries the state of a routeset  Any state change produces  a C7TU message  Also  enables and disables reports     Displays information about C7TU commands    Displays all message codes that can be used to specify the  CCS7 messages to be monitored through the C7TULINK  subdirectory    Exits the C7TU directory    Note  Commands C7TUDTC and C7TURFC are no longer supported           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 3    C7TULINK and C7TULINK_ILPT7 commands  Table 4 2 lists and describes the C7 TULINK and C7TULINK_ILPT7    commands     Table 4 2 C7TULINK commands       Command  ALTER  BUILD  DISPLAY    DUMP    HELP  INTERCEPT  MASK    MATCH    MONITOR    QUIT    REMOVE    RESTORE    SELECT    SEND    STATUS    enabled        Match table    Description  Modifies a test message  see Note   Builds a test message  see Note     Displays the message table  which contains test messages   see Not
76.  you have already left that directory     QUIT    Unable to quit requested number of levels    Meaning  You entered an n_levels variable replacement value that is too large     Action  Enter the QUIT ALL command string or retry the command with a  smaller number of levels                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    12 1       12 C 7TULINK directory commands    C7TULINK directory commands    Use the C7TULINK level of the MAP to access commands for monitoring  CCS7 messages  Links can be monitored as well        There are two versions of the C7TULINK environment  The basic C7TULINK  environment  C7TULINK_PMT7  allows you to access commands that  monitor messages only  you are not allowed to build  send  or intercept  messages unless you provide a valid password when accessing the C7TU MAP  level  The password protected C7 TULINK environment   C7TULINK_ILPT7  allows the user to use the basic C7TULINK commands  as well as commands used to build  send  or intercept messages     Accessing the C7TULINK directory    To access the C7TULINK directory level  enter the following command from  the CI  command interpreter  level      gt C7TU  C7TULINK  and press the Enter key     Accessing the password protected C7TULINK monitoring environment  The password protected C7TULINK environment is identified as the  C7TULINK_ILPT7  Integrated Link Protocol Test Tool  environment  In  order to gain access to password protected C7TULINK commands  you must  provide a valid password that
77. 0    12 26       13 C7UP directory commands   C7UP directory commands 13 1  Accessing the C7UP directory  C7UP directory commands 1   ACT 13 2   DEACT 13 4   HELP 13 6   QUIT 13 8   STATUS 13 9    14 MTPCVRT directory commands  14 1  Accessing the MTPCVRT directory  MTPCVRT directory commands    MTPCVRT directory commands    CONVERT 14 2  DISPLAY 14 5  HELP 14 7  QUIT 14 9    13 1    13 1  3 1    14 1    14 1  14 1       15 PROG directory commands  PROG directory commands 15 1    Accessing the PROG directory    PROG directory commands  GWXREF_ 15 2    15 1    15 1  15 1       16 SLS8BIT directory commands    SLS8BIT directory commands 16   Accessing the SLS8BIT direct  SLS8BIT directory commands   DISABLE 16 2   DISPL 16 6   ENABLE 16 8   HELP 16 12   QUIT 16 14    16 1  1   ory 16 1   16 1       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    xi       About this document       When to use this document    This document contains maintenance instructions for the Common Channel  Signaling 7  CCS7  network  This document also contains the description of  CCS7 network menu and non menu commands     How to check the version and issue of this document    The version and issue of the document are indicated by numbers  for example   01 01     The first two digits indicate the version  The version number increases each  time the document is updated to support a new software release  For example   the first release of a document is 01 01  In the next software release cycle  the  first release
78. 0 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 4 C7RTR directory commands  ACTIVATE  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the ACTIVATE command       MAP output Meaning and action    Action  Refer to table C7ROUTER        WARNING  You are activating LIU7 external routing while there are local SS7  node  s  with STP capability datafilled in the C7NETWRK table  NODE_TYPE    SSP_STP   If a total external router outage  TRO  occurs  STP traffic will                      stop because all signaling links will go SYSB    Meaning  This warning is an information only message to explain the possible  results of this command when the node type in table C7  NETWRK  is SSP_STP    Action  None             297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 5    DEACTIVATE  Command  DEACTIVATE  Directory  C7RTR  Function    Use the DEACTIVATE command to deactivate external routing  The  command forces the CCS7 digital trunk controllers  DTCs  to use MTP  routing tables  The DTCs use the MTP table information to route integrated  services user part  ISUP  messages     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example  Example of the DEACTIVATE command   gt DEACTIVATE    MAP response        External Routing deactivated        Explanation  External routing deactivates  CCS7 DTCs route ISUP messages           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guid
79. 00 Family    Common Channel Signaling 7  Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2    Product Documentation Dept  3423  Nortel Networks   P O  Box 13010   RTP  NC 27709 3010   Telephone  1 877 662 5669   Electronic mail  cits nortelnetworks com    Copyright    1998 2000 Nortel Networks   All Rights Reserved    NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL  The  information contained herein is the property of Nortel Networks  and is strictly confidential  Except as expressly authorized in  writing by Nortel Networks  the holder shall keep all information  contained herein confidential  shall disclose the information only  to its employees with a need to know  and shall protect the  information  in whole or in part  from disclosure and dissemination  to third parties with the same degree of care it uses to protect its  own confidential information  but with no less than reasonable  care  Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel  Networks  the holder is granted no rights to use the information  contained herein     Information is subject to change without notice  Nortel Networks  reserves the right to make changes in design and components as  progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant     DMS  MAP  NORTEL  NORTEL NETWORKS  the NORTEL  NETWORKS LOGO  NORTHERN TELECOM  NT  and  SUPERNODE are trademarks Nortel Networks     Publication number  297 8991 545  Product release  2000Q2   Document release  Standard 06 01  Date  July 2000   Printed in the United States of America    NORTEL  NET
80. 00300 C7GTWLKS LSO000100 C7GTWLKS LS000102  C7CTWLKS LS000104 C7GTWLKS LS000106 C7GTWLKS LS000108                                                 Meaning  This is the standard response for command GWXREF USERS   Action  None          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       PROG directory commands 15 7  GWXREF  end        Responses for the GWXREF command  Sheet 3 of 3     MAP output Meaning and action        lt Linkset name gt  is not a valid linkset name     Meaning  The linkset name specified does not exist in any of the tables     Action None    Unable to find the reference  lt reference name gt in the table  lt table name gt         Meaning  The reference does not exist in the specified table     Action  None  Invalid Symbol    Meaning  The table name is incorrect     Action  Re enter the table name from the list of valid table names                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 1       16 SLS8BIT directory commands       SLS8BIT directory commands  Use the SLS8BIT command to access the SLS8BIT directory level  Use the  commands available at this level to control the 8 bit signaling link selection   SLS  Load Balancing optionality  The 8 bit SLS is included in the software  optionality control  SOC  option TEL00009  To use any of the SLS8BIT  directory commands  the state of SOC option TELO0009 must be ON  Refer to  the Software Optionality Control User Manual  297 8991 901 for more  information on how to change the state of an option
81. 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 4 C7TU directory commands    C7TUPRT  Command   C7TUPRT  Directory   C7TU  Function    Use the C7TUPRT command to output all CCS7 messages saved in a specified  file  The messages are sent to the file using the C7TU directory C7TUREC  command     The C7TUPRT command examines the device and file names and verfies that  the files are in the correct format  This check consists of reading on the first  line of the file and confirming that this line matches thr string that always is  written when the C7TUREC command opens the file  If the file is in the correct  format  the C7TUPRT command reads in each message in the file and formats  the messages using the same routines formerly used by the log system to print  C7TU logs     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    C7TUPRTcommand parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables   C7TUPRT fileSCREEN   Item Description   file This variable specifies a valid file name    SCREEN Omitting this entry forces the system to default to display the messages on the    screen unless the SYS directory commands SEND or RECORD are used to  redirect the formatted output to another device              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TU directory commands 11 5    C7TUPRT  continued        Usage examples    The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Examp
82. 228    CCS229    CCS230    CCS231    CCS232  CCS233    CCS234  CCS235       Definition  The status of a local subsystem changes to system busy   The status of a local subsystem changes to in service     An SCMG at a remote point code is performing a subsystem status test  SST  ona  local subsystem     An SCMG has received an SSP for a remote subsystem that is not datafilled in the  local node   s network routing tables     The SCMG management has received an SSA for a remote subsystem that is not  datafilled in the local node   s network routing tables     The SCMG has received an SST for the status of a local subsystem  however  the  calling party address is not sufficient to return a response     A remote point code has been removed from table C7NETSSN and is now  unequipped     A message with an invalid global title  GT  in the called party address  CDPA  has  been received from the network  Routing is attempted  even with the protocol error     A message with an invalid GT in the calling party address  CGPA  has been received  from the network  Routing is attempted  even with the protocol error     A message is received from the network requiring a global title translation  GTT   The  network address produced is invalid for an SCCP at an SSP  and the message is  returned     There is a status change for a remote point code that has been returned to service   and is now in service trouble  This situation occurs when the routeset to this point  code becomes congested or res
83. 256 intercepts all clusters           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 33  INTERCEPT  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 6 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables          Command    dpc_mainarea    dpc_mem    dpc_netwk    dpc_sigpoint    dpc_subarea    GERMAN    hex_bytes    INTL  INTL2    JPN    LABEL  LINK    Iset_name    msg_code    Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the DPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     0 to 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 intercepts all main area numbers   0 to 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 intercepts all main area numbers     0 to 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 intercepts all main area numbers     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all members     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all networks     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid entry  range for is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all signal points     This variable specifies the DPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     0 to 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 intercepts all subareas   0 to 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 intercepts all subareas   0 to 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 intercep
84. 297 8991 545    DMS 100 Family    Common Channel Signaling 7  Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2    2000Q2 Standard 06 01 July 2000          NORTEL  NETWORKS    How the world shares ideas        DMS 100 Family  Common Channel Signaling 7  Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2       Publication number  297 8991 545  Product release  2000Q2  Document release  Standard 06 01  Date  July 2000       Copyright    1998 2000 Nortel Networks   All Rights Reserved    Printed in the United States of America    NORTEL NETWORKS CONFIDENTIAL  The information contained herein is the property of Nortel Networks and is  strictly confidential  Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks  the holder shall keep all information contained  herein confidential  shall disclose the information only to its employees with a need to know  and shall protect the information  in  whole or in part  from disclosure and dissemination to third parties with the same degree of care it uses to protect its own  confidential information  but with no less than reasonable care  Except as expressly authorized in writing by Nortel Networks  the  holder is granted no rights to use the information contained herein     Information is subject to change without notice  Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as  progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant     DMS  MAP  NORTEL  NORTEL NETWORKS  the NORTEL NETWORKS LOGO  NORTHERN TELECOM  NT  and SUPERNODE  are trademarks N
85. 6 01 July 2000          Maintenance summary 1 17    One link can handle all signaling traffic for a routeset  Links can operate in a  load sharing configuration     A combined linkset consists of two linksets which provide equal but alternate  routing between the same nodes     Figure 1 9 shows an example of a routeset and its associated linkset     Figure 1 8 Example of a routeset and associated linkset       ISUP trunks        Linkset AB1        Associated mode          Linkset AD1 Linkset AC1        Quasi associated    Quasi associated  mode  through STP     mode  through STP        Note  1  Routeset AB  Route 0   linkset AB1  Route 1   linkset AC1  Route 2   linkset AD1  2  Associated  direct  mode has the highest priority   3  Combined linkset  linkset AC1 and linkset AD1             Mapping CCS7 hardware to protocol  Figure 1 9 shows the functions of DMS components        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 18 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 9 Functions of DMS components                                       Cross connect MERS  device e Message discrimination   by point code  SCCP          e Message distribution to MTP  routing  to SCCP routing  to  ISUP distributor  or to MTP  network management   network management  shared     All real time  intensive call  setup features                  Digital  trunk controller                            Network    Network module 0  Network module 1         ISUP  ISUP  distribution  to DTC    SCCP  e SCC
86. 8 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the DPC knotenvermittlungsstelle  trunk tandem switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 16     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all members     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all  networks        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 14 C7TULINK directory commands    BUILD  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 4 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables       d_numarea    d_pc    d_region    dpc_areaunit    dpc_cluster    dpc_mainarea    dpc_mem    dpc_netwk    dpc_sigpoint    dpc_subarea    GERMAN    hex_bytes       This variable specifies the DPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16     This variable specifies the DPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The valid  entry range is 0 to 16384  The entry of 16384 specifies all DPCs     This variable specifies the DPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  or INTL  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA format is 0 to 16  The entry of 16  monitors all regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 format is 0 to 8  The entry of  8 monitors all regions     This variable specifies the DPC area unit number of the T
87. ABLE TO RESOLVE POINT CODES             Meaning  You attempted to send a message using a default linkset  The error  occurred either because this linkset is not part of a routeset  or because the routeset  is not a valid network  The SEND command exits     Action  Verify that the specified linkset is part of a routeset  and that the routeset is  part of a valid network  Retry the SEND command                       WARNING  LINK MUST BE IN SYNC STATE FOR MESSAGE INJECTION             WARNING  MESSAGE WILL BE SENT ANYWAY             Meaning  The peripheral that is attached to the specified link in the linkset is in  service  but the link state is not set to synchronized  The message is sent to the  peripheral     Action  None                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 70 C7TULINK directory commands    STATUS  Command   STATUS  Directory   C7TULINK  Function    Use the STATUS command to display the current status of the C7TULINK  environment  The display includes links and a shortened dump of the entries  in the match table     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    STATUS command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables  STATUS BRIEF  VERBOSE  Item Description  BRIEF This parameter displays only the links that are selected   VERBOSE This parameter displays all links  marking the ones that are selected     
88. Action  Use the SELECT command to enable the C7TU in the peripheral modules  that are to be used     C7TU is not enabled on  lt  pm_num gt  where this link resides    MSG    Meaning  The MONITOR command executed  and the request was added to the  match table     Action  Use the SELECT command to enable the C7TU in the peripheral module  that is to be used     type has been overwritten    Meaning  The command executed  The message body that comes after the routing  label has been overwritten with the entries or default for the data parameter  The  default entry zero fills all data bytes after the routing label up to the truncating limit  of 16 bytes for a match entry     Action  None       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 59       QUIT  Command  QUIT  Directory  C7TULINK  Function  Use the QUIT command to exit the  C7TULINK environment and return to the C7TU level   Usage notes  None  Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables   Parameters and variables  QUIT command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  QUIT CLEAR  NOCLEAR  Item Description  CLEAR This parameter clears the C7TULINK environment before quitting and the system  returns you to the Cl level   NOCLEAR This parameter leaves the C7TULINK environment intact and the system returns    you to the Cl level              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 60 C7TULINK directo
89. C signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all signal  points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA   The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the DPC exchange of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all exchanges     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the DPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16     This variable specifies the DPC hauptvermittlungsstelle  tandem level switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 8     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format INTL   The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  The  valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 
90. ET menu level             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 18 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Table 4 4 C7BERT commands  Sheet 2 of 2     Command Description   REPORT Requests periodic queries on a test  SETSTOP Presets a time for a C7BERT to stop  START Starts a C7BERT   STOP Stops a C7BERT             Manual loopback tests  Use manual loopback tests with the C7LKSET level of the MAP to locate a  facility fault  For more detail  refer to the Troubleshooting a facility fault  procedure in the  Advanced troubleshooting procedures  chapter     ISUP continuity testing  Since the signaling component and the voice or data component follow  separate paths in a CCS7 network  voice and data connections are not  automatically guaranteed by successful transmission of the signaling  component  To monitor the quality of ISUP trunk connections  do the  following     e specify per call continuity tests for trunks through datafilling    e perform on demand continuity tests from the MAP       CAUTION   Real time effect on call setup time   Continuity testing has a real time affect on call processing   Use continuity testing as a sampling tool on an  appropriate percentage of calls  rather than on all calls                 How continuity testing works  The following events occur during an ISUP continuity test  COT      1  The originating office sends the appropriate tone on the transmit channel  of the trunk     2  Atthe terminating office  the tone 
91. FP 3 Busy CTRL 0  Command request has been submitted   FP 3 Busy CTRL 0  Command passed        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    1 1       1 Maintenance summary       This chapter contains a description of Common Channel Signaling 7  CCS7   networks  The chapter provides a description of the DMS Signaling Point  SP   Service Switching Point SP SSP   Signaling Transfer Point  STP   and  integrated node  INode   The chapter describes the purpose of these points in  a CCS7 network     Maintenance philosophy  describes the types of maintenance activities this guide covers     CCS7 functional description  contains an summary of CCS7 signaling  protocol  messaging  and hardware  architecture     DMS architecture  describes DMS STP   SP SPP  and  Node functions and equipment     DMS tasks  describes DMS STP   SP SPP  and INode features     DMS documentation  contains lists of CCS7 documentation     Maintenance philosophy  This section describes two types of maintenance activities  reactive and  preventive     Reactive maintenance activities  Reactive maintenance activities are the responses to problems  like  requests  for help from personnel that perform maintenance procedures at the switch   Procedures in other maintenance documents instruct personnel to  contact  your next level of support         DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 2 Maintenance summary    Use the following chapters for reactive maintenance activities   e Troubleshooting chart 
92. I    oc  oc    NET  XXX    10    00  00    11    oc  Oc     gt MONITOR LINK TR000004 0 BOTH ANSI ALL SCCP DATA     gt MONITOR LINK MGO000001 0 BOTH ANSI ALL SCCP DATA    H1    SI  SCCP XXX  SCCP XXX  OPC  MEM CLU  XXX XXX  12  13  14  00 00 00  00 00 00  OPC  MEM CLU  XXX XXX  12  13 14  00 00 00  00 00 00    SLS TYPE  NET  XXX XX XXX  15  00  00    SLS TYPE  NET  XXX XX XXX  15  00  00          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 9    Figure 4 6 Example of monitoring CCS7 messages with an E800VER  command  continued from Figure 4 5 and to Figure 4 7        The command E800VER is used in a DMS SSP to generate some CCS7 SCCP  messages      gt E800VER 9192781052 110 8003621234    MAP display    H    HE RESPONSE FROM THE DATABASE TOOK  MINUTES  0 SECONDS  200 MILLISECONDS    j      H    HE FOLLOWING NUMBER IS THE CARRIER NUMBER  HE NUMBER IS 110          H    HE FOLLOWING NUMBER IS T  HE NUMBER IS 9193620156    m    E ROUTING NUMBER          H    BILLING INDICATOR CALL TYPE IS 141C  BILLING INDICATOR SFI IS 023C             THE FOLLOWING NUMBER IS T  THE NUMBER IS 704554321    m    E BILLING NUMBER                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 10 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 7 Example of monitoring CCS7 messages with an E800VER    command  continued from Figure 4 6              Logs generated at DMS STP  RTC_STP C7TU101 JAN16 21 28 27 3305 INFO INCOMING LINK MSG  C7 HEADER
93. M message  data differences can occur      The DDM checks the sequence of the numbers every 2 min and the table  consistency every hour  If the DDM detects a data differences  the DDM  updates the table in the LIU or DTC  This action makes the table same as the  table in the CM     Table 1 7 lists the tables that are subject to static data audits     Table 1 7 Table subject to static data audits       Table DTC LIU  C7NETWRK Yes Yes  C7LKSET Yes Yes  C7LINK Yes Yes  C7RTESET Yes Yes  C7TIMER No Yes  C7TRKMEM No Yes  C7ALIAS No Yes             297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 23    Channelized link access  Channelized link access removes the need for external channel banks for DS 0  connections between signaling data links and LIU7s  Instead of requiring a  dedicated link to each LIU7  a channel bus  C bus  performs access   Duplicated network interface units  NIU  transfer data between the network  and the C bus  MLIU channelized link access functions in the same way     With channelized access  data transfer between signaling data links and LIU7s  or MLIUs integrates into automated system maintenance  Refer to the section   Automated system maintenance  in this chapter for more information     The following sections describe how channelized access works  For hardware  information  refer to the Provision Guide  PLN 8991 104    e Data transfer from LIU7s or MLIUs to the network   e Bus configuration   e LIU7 support of channelized access   e C bus
94. Meaning  You specified a link number that is not datafilled for the specified linkset  in table C7LINK  The INTERCEPT command exits     Action  Verify the link number and retry the INTERCEPT command with the correct  number        ERROR  INVALID LINKSET NAME                Meaning  You specified a linkset name that does not appear in table C7_LKSET     Action  Verify the linkset name  and retry the INTERCEPT command with the  correct linkset     ERROR  INVALID MSGCODE ZPF          Meaning  You entered a message code that is not recognized by C7TU  The  INTERCEPT command exits     Action  Verify the message code and retry the command     ERROR  MATCH TABLE FULL          Meaning  The match table already has eight entries  No further requests can be  made  The INTERCEPT command exits     Action  Remove an existing entry from the match table and retry the command        ERROR  MATCHING ECM MESSAGES IS NOT PERMITTED                            Meaning  You entered a message code that was recognized by C7TU  but a match  is not allowed for the specified code  The INTERCEPT command exits     Action  Verify the message code and retry the INTERCEPT command with a  correct message code           ONLY FOUR INTERCEPTS ALLOWED IN FIELD ENVIRONMENT                            Meaning  Four entries already exist in the match table  The field environment allows  only four entries in the match table  The INTERCEPT command exits     Action  Remove an existing intercept or intercept request and r
95. NAU  C7LINH  C7AUTOCO  C7EXDDLAY  CC7SUERR  C7NETCON  C7MANBY  C7RINH    C7ERRSEC  C7LKSYNU    C7MSUDC1  C7MSUDC2  C7MSUDC3  C7MSUDS   C7MSURX  C7MSURX2    Associated logs    CCS101  CCS102  CCS101   CCS108   CCS101  CCS107  PM102  PM105  CCS101   CCS101    CCS164  CCS104  CCS101    CCS163  CCS164  CCS159  CCS101    CCS157  CCS160    CCS101  CCS102             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    3 6 CCS7 network operational measurements    Table 3 2 CCS7 network priority OM registers  Sheet 3 of 5     Performance factor    Link congestion    Link usage    Global title translation    LIU faults    Linkset availability  Linkset failures    MDR7 message loss    Cross STP delay       OM group  C7LINK2    C7LINK2    C7LINK2  C7SCCP    C7LINK3    C7LKSET  C7LKSET  C7MDR    C7MTP    Register    C7MSUDSC    C7MSUDC1  C7MSUDC2  C7MSUDC3  C7MSURX   C7MSURX2    C7MSUTX  C7MSUTX2    C7BYTTX  C7BYTTX2  C7BYTRX  C7BYTRX2    C7MSURX  C7MSURX2  C7MSGTT  C7MSGTT2    C7LPOU  C7RPOU    C7LSUNAU  C7LSFAIL    M7SSUNA1   M7SSUNA2  M7MSURC1  M7MSURC2    C7XSDYWT  C7XSDYNT    Associated logs       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network operational measurements 3 7    Table 3 2 CCS7 network priority OM registers  Sheet 4 of 5   Performance factor OM group Register Associated logs    MTP message C7MTP C7MSIDPC      screening C7LINK2 C7MSISIO g    C7MSURX  C7MSURX2    Route availability C7ROUTE C7RTUNAU    C7TFA CCS180  C7TFR CCS181  C7TFP    C7TFCO    C7TFC1
96. NETWRK  CONVERT es 6 eles Convert the network to a new specified PC format  LEAVE QUIT     1 EXIT MTPCVRT CI TOOL   ENTER  Q  lt COMMAND NAME gt   FOR MORE INFORMATION                            Explanation  The MAP display lists all commands available at the MTPCVRT directory              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    14 8 MTPCVRT directory commands  HELP  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the HELP command       MAP output Meaning and action                                           MTP PC FORMAT CONVERSION COMMANDS    DISPLAY         Display all the networks defined in table C7NETWRK  CONVERT re tete a Convert the network to a new specified PC format  LEAVE QUIT     EXIT MTPCVRT CI TOOL   ENTER  Q  lt COMMAND NAME lt   FOR MORE INFORMATION    Meaning  The MAP display lists all commands available at the MTPCVRT directory   Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    MTPCVRT directory commands 14 9    QUIT  Command  QUIT  Directory  MTPCVRT  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit out of the MTPCVRT directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response   Crs          Explanation  You have exited out of the MTPCVRT directory     Responses  None       DMS 100 Family CCS7
97. NTCHK of table TRKSGRP          Entry Description   LOOPAROUND Sets up a loopback  The terminating office automatically  transmits a tone back to the originating office    THRH Transmits a high tone and expects to receive a high tone   THRL Transmits a low tone and expects to receive a low tone   TLRH Transmits a low tone and expects to receive a high tone   2W2W Transmits THRL when originating and TLRH when     two wire two way  terminating  For use in cut over situations in which a DMS  must emulate test behavior of a non DMS  two wire switch  operating on two way trunks              Note  For most continuity tests  the tone combinations assigned to each  switch remain the same regardless of call direction  However  for the  two wire two way continuity tests  the tone combinations are related to call  direction  Because the originating switch must be assigned the THRL tone  combination  the tone combination is redefined automatically for each call     Figure 4 20 shows continuity test tones for different trunk terminations        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 26 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 20 Continuity test tones for different trunk terminations       Tones  THRH    TLRH    THRL    THRL       Originating office Terminating office                                                             4 wire 4 wire  DMS DMS  4 wire 2 wire  DMS non DMS  2 wire 4 wire  non DMS DMS    2 wire 2 wire    emulation  DMS non DMS       
98. P  functionality to ON  but the functionality is not activated until the SOC option  TELO00009 is set to ON     Action  Activate SOC option TEL00009 by setting the SOC state to ON  Refer  to the Software Optionality Control User Manual 297 8991 901     Warning XUDT messages will be originated by this node following this  SOC transition  Message loss will occur if the network does  not support XUDT XUDTS messages     Meaning  Operating company personnel can set the state of the SAR or CRP  functionality to ON  but the functionality is not activated until the SOC option  TELO0009 is set to ON  When SOC option TEL00009 is activated  the  subsystems can originate extended unit data  KUDT  messages  If the nodes in  which the subsystems reside do not support XUDT messages  the messages  are discarded     Action  Operating company personnel disable SAR or CRP for the subsystems  to prevent message loss              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    10 8 C7SARCRP directory commands    STATUS  Command   STATUS  Directory   C7SARCRP  Function    The STATUS command displays the status of the segmentation and  reassembly  SAR  or circular routing prevention  CRP  functionalities for one  or all local subsystems     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    STATUS command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables  STATUS subsyst
99. P router  e SCCP message  handler                                        DMS bus    DMS core         MTP  e Link maintenance   shared with IPF   e Network management for   traffic  links  and routes   shared with IPF   e Linkset control                      ISUP     Translations     Network   connection  setup          SCCP  e Linkset control  e SCCP management  control   e Database of point   orders and  subsystem  numbers         Legend     IPF Integrated processor and F bus interface  PB Paddle board  ST Signaling terminal             DMS architecture    A DMS STP is a packet switching system that transports messages between  CCS7 nodes  DMS STPs are nodes that transfer messages between incoming       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 19    and outgoing SLs  The DMS STPs do not originate or terminate messages   except NWM information messages     DMS STPs are deployed in pairs  If one DMS STP fails  the mate takes over  to make sure there is no interruption in service     The DMS STP combines the DMS 100 Family and DMS SuperNode  equipment  Figure 1 10 shows the DMS STP equipment configuration     Figure 1 10 DMS STP equipment configuration                                                                                                                                                                      Magnetic Network 00      Alarm  tape drive cross   connect  shelf  FSP   FSP  Filler panel Maint   trunk  module MS 0 LMSO   LMS1  Input  Networ
100. Q1    Match   Mask        NI  NATL  2 3   00 00  00 00    DPC  CLU  000    OPC  CLU  005  14  01  FF     gt MONITOR LINK LINKSET1 1 IN ANSI LABEL NATL 0 256 256 256 4567  SLTM PARMS 01 10    1 5    00  00    SLS TYPE  NET  004 07 SLIM          Figure 4 5  4 6 and 4 7 show the commands required to monitor all messages  when an E800VER command is issued to query an 800 Service database  without making a call        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 8 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 5 Example of monitoring CCS7 messages with an E800VER  command  continued on Figures 4 6 and 4 7         gt LOGUTIL START   gt  C7TU     gt C7TULINK     gt SELECT LIU7 2 ON   gt SELECT LIU7 16 ON   gt STATUS    MAP display    KKK KKK EK    LIU7 FTA Tracing  2 4244 1000 ENABLE  16 4247 1000 ENABLE    Item Disp NI  0 MON ALL  1 MON ALL    ANSI  ANSI     gt DUMP 0 1  MAP display    NUMBER OF VALID    C7TU MON SIO  NUM DIR NET NI PR  0 BOTH ANSI ALL XX  Oo 1 2 a AA   Match  00 04 00 00 03  Mask  00 FF 00 00 OF  C7TU MON SIO  NUM DIR NET NI PR  0 BOTH ANSI ALL XX   amp  LT 2 3 4   Match  00 04 00 00 03  Mask  00 FF 00 00 OF       C7TULINK Environment    Nettype Dir    BOTH  BOTH    MATCH ENTRIES      ERRARE    Link  LINK  LINK    A dump of the match table is requested     2  MEM  XXX   7 8  00 00  00 00  MEM  XXX   7 8  00 00  00 00    Dist Msg  5 EXT  2 EXT    DPC  CLU  XXX    00  00    DPC  CLU  XXX    00  00    XXX  XXX    NET  XXX    10    00  00    T
101. Step 3  is not isolated Step 4  3 Immediately contact the network management administrator to have the    appropriate network controls invoked  Follow local operating procedures for  severe failures     4 To determine if the problem is at the STP switch connected to the DMS  SP SSP STP SCP and not a facility problem  place a loopback as close to the  STP switch as possible     Determine the state of the link at the C7LKSET level of the MAP display        If the synchronization Do  changes from SysB to RPO Step 5  remains SysB Step 9  5 The problem is not at the DMS STP  To determine if the problem is at the    office at the other end of the link DMS SP SSP DMS SCP   place a loopback  as close to that office as possible     6 Manually busy the link to disable the signaling network link test  SNLT   message from being sent to the far end     7 Determine the state of the link at the MAP display        If the synchronization state Do  changes from SysB to RPO Step 8  remians SysB Step 10    8 The problem is not at the office at the other end of the link DMS SP SSP  DMS SCFR  it is somewhere on the facility itself  Perform the procedure  Troubleshooting a facility fault    in this document  When you have completed the procedure  return to this  point     Go to Step 10     9 The problem is in the DMS STP switch  Change the CCS7 link interface unit   LIU7   multiple link interface unit  MLIU   high speed link interface unit   HLIU   or high speed link router  HSLR  circuit cards in 
102. TC  The entry of 256 monitors all main area numbers    opc_mem This variable specifies the OPC member number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all members    opc_netwk This variable specifies the OPC network number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all networks    opc_sigpoint This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid entry    opc_subarea    range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC message   The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all subareas     PARMS This parameter means that for some message codes the system will generate a list  of parameters available to the user   priority This variable specifies the CCS7 priority of the message to be monitored  The valid    entry range is 0 to 4  The entry of 4 specifies all priorities           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 55  MONITOR  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 8 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables    slink_code This variable specifies the signaling link number of the linkset to be monitored  The  valid entry range is 0 to 15
103. TC or JPN message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all area units     This variable specifies the DPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all clusters     This variable specifies the DPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers   e Oto 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers     e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all main area numbers     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all members     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all networks     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid entry  range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the DPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all subareas     This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This variable string specifies the new hex bytes in the message body  The new  bytes override the existing byt
104. The  valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all zones     This variable specifies an OPC knotenvermittlungsstelle  trunk tandem switching  exchange  for the CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from  0 to 16     This variable specifies the OPC member number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all members     This variable specifies the OPC network number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all  networks     This variable specifies the OPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16     This variable specifies the OPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The valid  entry range is 0 to 16384     This variable specifies the OPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  or INTL2  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors  all regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all  regions     This variable specifies the OPC area unit number of the TTC or JPN message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all area units     This variable specifies the OPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all clusters           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 17  BUILD  continued           Parameters a
105. U   including password protected commands  available through the integrated link protocol test LPT  tool    e CCS7 bit error rate test  C7BERT     e manual loopback tests    CCS7 test utility  The C7TU allows you to monitor CCS7 messages on CCS7 links using the  C7TULINK commands  In addition  if you have access to the  password protected C7TULINK_ILPT7  you can build messages and send  them over CCS7 links to test the effect on a piece of equipment or on software   and you can intercept CCS7 messages before they are sent into the network     CAUTION   Possible service disruptions   Use the C7TU with caution as it can affect the service  performance of the switch              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 2 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Limitations    Because C7TU can affect service  the following limitations have been built    into the utility     e A maximum of two users can be logged in to C7TU at one time     e A maximun of eight links can be selected at one time for offices operating  on software releases TL11  BASE12  and up     e For STP customers  a maximum of four links can be selected at one time     e A maximum of eight selection criteria entries for monitoring and  intercepting messages can be specified at one time     e Only the first 16 bytes of each CCS7 message are compared to selection    criteria     e A maximum of eight messages can be built at one time     Note  These limitations apply to C7TU as a whole  not
106. U7  routers     Accessing the C7RTR directory    To access the C7RTR directory level  enter the following command from the  CI level      gt C7RTR    and press the Enter key     C7RTR directory commands  The following commands are available at the C7RTR directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     ACTIVATE   DEACTIVATE  DOWNLOAD_MTP   HELP  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  QUERY_EXP_RTESETS  QUERY_MAX_ROUTESETS  QUIT   REMOVE_MTP       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 2 C7RTR directory commands    ACTIVATE  Command   ACTIVATE  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the ACTIVATE command to activate Common Channel Signaling 7   CCS7  link interface unit  LIU7  external routing  The command sends a  message to the digital trunk controllers  DTC  to use the LIU7s to route  integrated services digital network  ISDN  user part  ISUP  messages     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example  Example of the ACTIVATE command   gt ACTIVATE    MAP response        External Routing has been activated        Explanation  External routing has been activated  LIU7s are now routing ISUP messages              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 3  ACTIVATE  continued        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the ACTIVATE command       MAP 
107. ULL  LINKSET    linkset_name    max_levels    max_no    REF    reference_name    table_name    USERS       Parameters and Variables                LINKSET linkset_name max_levels FULL   REF table_name reference_nam max_no  USERS table_name reference_nam  Description    This parameter specifies a full display of information for all tables     Use this parameter to display all screening references in all tables associated  with a specified linkset     This variable specifies the name of the linkset to be queried     This optional variable specifies the maximum number of responses to be  displayed     This variable specifies the maximum number of entries to be displayed  The  range is 1 to 10     Use this parameter to list a reference within a specified table and all associated  references in other tables     This variable specifies the screening reference value from field REFERNCE in  the specified table     This variable specifies the table in which you want to search     Use this parameter to display all users of the specified entity set and reference  name           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       15 4 PROG directory commands    GWXREF  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the GWXREF command        gt GWXREF REF C7CGPA REFO 10  where    C7CGPA  is the table name    REFO  is the reference name    10  is the maximum number of entries to be displayed    MAP resp
108. WORKS     How the world shares ideas     
109. _ROUTING       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 2 C7RTRQRY directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   C7RTRORY  Function    Use the HELP command to display a list of available commands in the  C7RTRQRY directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example                                     Example of the HELP command    gt HELP   MAP response    C7RTRORY  External Routing Query Utitlity  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING Query the state of External Routing  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING Translate trunk CIC to routing path  QUIT Exit C7RTRORY   HELP Display this information   Explanation  C7RTRQRY commands display              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 3  HELP  end        Responses    Commmand responses    The following table describes the MAP responses        Responses for the HELP command       MAP output    C7RTRO    RY                    Q  T  QUIT  H    ELP       UERY    EXT_ROUTING    RNSL_TRK_ROUTING    Meaning and action       External Routi    ng Query Utility       Query the stat  Translate trun    Exit C7RTRORY       Display this i          of External Routing    k CIC to routing path       nformation    Meaning  The C7RTRQRY commands display     Action  None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 4 C7RTRQRY directory commands    QUERY_EXT_ ROUTING    Comma
110. acknowledgement message in error  Set  threshold to determine origin    CCS238 no alarm An invalid CSCC message has been received from the network   Determine originating node and check SCCP subsystem datafill    CCS240 no alarm Check for correct datafill in tables CZLOCSSN and C7NETSSN    CCS241 no alarm A message cannot be routed in an LIU  Set threshold to isolate faulty  items              Where to find log information  The following documents provide additional information about logs   e Alarm and Performance Monitoring Procedures     Log Report Reference Manual  e Trouble Locating and Clearing Procedures    e DMS 100 Family Maintenace and Operations Manual  297 899 1 500       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    3 1       3 CCS7 network operational  measurements    Operational measurements  OM  provide information that is based on events  in the DMS switch  Real time maintenance activities  longer term  maintenance analysis  and administration tasks use OM information     Note  When OMs are polled  the contents of active registers do not  necessarily contain current information  since the frequency of updated data  received at the computing module  CM  varies depending on the peripheral  module type and its status     CCS7 network OM groups    Table 3 1 lists the OM groups associated with a CCS7 network  The following  documents provide additional information about CCS7 OMs     e DMS 100 Family Maintenace and Operations Manual  297 899 1 500  e
111. activate external routing or wait for  a DDM audit to correct the data  Examine the DDM logs for any  problems     Successful deactivation                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7RTR directory commands 8 7  DEACTIVATE  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the DEACTIVATE command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  External routing is deactivated  CCS7 DTCs route ISUP messages     Action  None       Can not deactivate LIU7 external routing because ther    are greater than 108  links in C7LINK and DTC datafilled in table LTCINV        Meaning  You cannot deactivate LIU7 external routing when there are more  than 108 links entered in table C7LINK and DTCs exist in table  LTCINV    Action  Reduce the number of links to 108 or less  or remove DTCs from    table LTCINV  Enter command DEACTIVATE again              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 8 C7RTR directory commands    DOWNLOAD_MTP    Command   DOWNLOAD_MTP  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the DOWNLOAD_MTP command to download message transfer part   MTP  routing tables to the digital trunk controllers  DTC      Usage notes    After command DOWNLOAD_MTP is used  MTP routing tables are not  updated until a DDM audit is run     Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the DOWNLOAD_MTP command        gt DOWNLOAD_MTP  MAP response     MTP
112. all regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 is 0 to 8  The entry of 8  intercepts all regions     This variable specifies the OPC area unit number of the TTC or JPN message   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 intercepts all area units     This variable specifies the OPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all clusters              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 36 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 9 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    opc_mainarea    opc_mem    opc_netwk    opc_sigpoint    opc_subarea    PARMS    priority    slink_code       Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the OPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     0 to 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 intercepts all main area numbers   0 to 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 intercepts all main area numbers     0 to 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 intercepts all main area numbers     This variable specifies the OPC member number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all members     This variable specifies the OPC network number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all networks     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid 
113. alue is received     ROUTING This parameter changes the routing label of the message     sls This variable specifies the SLS of the ANSI  CCITT  JPN  or TTC test message   The valid entry range for ANSI and JPN messages is 0 to 31  The valid entry  range for TTC and CCITT messages is 0 to 15              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 8 C7TULINK directory commands    ALTER  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the ALTER command        gt ALTER 0 LENGTH 200    where    0  is the message number  200  new length of the message identified by message numberr    MAP response              C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPC SLS  num type length ni pr si mem clu net mem clu net  O SLTM 9 2 3 2 001 001 001 002 002 002 0  Message bytes   0123 45 67 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19          00 00 09 00 00 02 01 B2 01 01 01 02 02 02 00 11 01 01          C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPC SLS  num type length ni pr si mem clu net mem clu net  O SLTM 200 2 3 2 001 001 001 002 002 002 0  Message bytes   0123 45 67 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19                00 00 C8 00 00 02 01 B2 01 01 01 02 02 02 00 11 01 01    Explanation The system displays the original message number 0 and the subsequent display of the  altered message number 0                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 9  ALTER  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP re
114. ameters and variables                                                                Command Parameters and variables  BUILD  msg_no  CCITT DEFAULT  1   LABEL ntwk_indicator priority BASIC  2   INTL  AUSTRIA  CHINA  GERMAN  INTL2  ANSI DEFAULT  3   LABEL ntwk_indicator priority dpc_mem  4   TTG DEFAULT  5   ABEL ntwk_indicator priority dpc_mainarea  6   JPN DEFAULT  7   ABEL ntwk_indicator priority dpc_mainarea  8   NTC DEFAULT  9   LABEL ntwk_indicator priority dpc_sigpoint  10    cont inued   BUILD   1   1    2  dpe O_pc  2   d_intlzone d_areantw d_intlsgpt  d_auctioned d_region d_austsgpt  d_chnzone d_exchange d_chnsgpt  d_numarea d_hvst d_kvst d_gersgpt   3  d network d_region d_group d_member  3    4  dpc_cluster dpc_netwk opc_mem opc_cluster opc_netwk  4    5   5    6  dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea opc_subarea  6    7   7    8  dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea opc_subarea  8    9   9    10 dpc_mainarea dpc_subarea opc_sigpoint opc_mainarea 10    continued                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 12 C7TULINK directory commands    BUILD  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables       BUILD    BUILD    ltem    ANSI    AUSTRIA  BASIC  CCITT  CHINA  DATA    DEFAULT           1     2  BASIC sls  2   INTL o_intlzone o_areantw o_intlsgpt  AUSTRIA o_austzone o_region o_austsgpt  CHINA o_chnzone o_exchange o_chnsgpt  GERMAN o_numarea o_hvst o_kvst o_gersgpt  INTL2 o_network
115. anced troubleshooting procedures 6 25    Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps  continued        Common procedures  None    Action    Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps    At your current location  1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary        If the F bus or F  taps problem Do    still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 10  2 Determine which F bus taps are not functioning   If the problem is with Do  some F bus taps on one shelf Step 3    all the F bus taps on one shelf Step 4    some or all the F bus taps onone Step 6  shelf    3 Replace the F bus interface cards  NTEX22  for each CCS7 link interface unit   LIU7   multiple link interface unit  MLIU   high speed link interface unit   HLIU   or high speed link router  HSLR               If the F bus problem Do   still exists Step 4   no longer exists step 10   4 Replace the F bus terminator cards  NTEX20  for the shelf  There are two  NTEX20 spares  the NTEX20AA for F bus 0  and the NTEX20BA for F bus 1    If the F bus problem Do   still exists Step 5   no longer exists Step 10       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 26 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps  end        5    10    Replace the F bus terminator cards  NTEX20  on other shelves  including  both LMS and LIU shelves        If the F bus problem Do  still exists Step 8  no longer exists Step 10    Replace the F bus terminator cards  NTEX20  on all shelves     If th
116. and H is OK   4  Since the common signaling paths are the B links connecting the local DMS STP  pairs  remove B links from service one at a time  and observe the effect   Common procedures  None  Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure   Troubleshooting a message sink  At your current location  1 Manually busy one of the CCS7 link interface units  LIU7   multiple link    interface units  MLIU   or the pairs of high speed link interface unit  HLIU  and  high speed link router  HSLR   Observe the effect on the messaging  disruption  If the offending path has been removed from service  the number  of out of service trunks  indicated by alarms  immediately begins to       decrease   If Do  the problem is resolved Step 4    the problem is not resolved and Step 2  not all links have been tested    the problem is not resolved and Step 3  all links have been tested    2 Bring the LIU7  MLIU  or HLIU and HSLR back to service  Go back toStep 1        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 20 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting a message sink  end        3 The problem cannot be resolved at your office  Contact the DMS STP your  node is connected to  Go to Step 5    4 Bring the LIU7  MLIU  or HLIU and HSLR back to service    5 You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Application    Definition    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 21    Troublehshooting an ASU    Use this procedure to trouble
117. and could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Active   Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to    Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt     Command failed in CM  Unknown error     Meaning  External routing is active  Command could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Command failed in DTC  lt   gt   Unknown error     Meaning  External routing is active  Command could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Routing translation failed in DTC  lt   gt         Meaning  External routing is active  Command could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Buffering Msgs for     Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 17  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Command responses  Sheet 7 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  External routing is active  DTC  lt   gt  is buffering messages for  router  lt   gt      Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      DTC  lt   gt  Discarding Msgs  No available routers     Meaning  External routing is active  DTC  lt   gt  is discarding messages  because there are no available rout
118. ansition       8 bit SLS is       Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the process of being activated   Action  None   in deactivation transition   Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the process of being deactivated     Action  None       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       16 8 SLS8BIT directory commands    ENABLE  Command   ENABLE  Directory   SLS8BIT  Function    Use the command ENABLE to activate 8   bit SLS load balancing     Usage notes    Set the state of SOC option TEL00009 to ON before entering this command   Refer to the Software Optionality Control User Manual  297   8991 901 for  more information on how to change the state of an option     Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the ENABLE command        gt ENABLE  MAP response     8 bit SLS activation transition completed        Explanation The command was successful  8    bit SLS is now active              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 4     Responses for the ENABLE command       MAP output Meaning and action       8 bit SLS activation transition completed        Meaning  The command was successful  8   bit SLS is now active                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    SLS8BIT directory commands 16 9  ENABLE  continued        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 4     Responses for the ENABLE command       MAP output Meaning and acti
119. aps    Troubleshooting F bus and F bus taps  Troubleshooting links and linksets  Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Troubleshooting an ASU    Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Troubleshooting routes and routesets  Troubleshooting routes and routesets    Troubleshooting F bus and F bus taps    Troubleshooting F bus and F bus taps  Troubleshooting a LIM unit  Troubleshooting a links and linksets    Troubleshooting an ASU    Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Troubleshooting a LIM unit    Troubleshooting a message sink       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Troubleshooting chart 5 3    Table 5 1 CCS7 troubleshooting  Sheet 3 of 3     Problem Possible cause Perform the procedure   Out of service signals from far Facility fault Troubleshooting a facility fault   end   Thrashing link Troubleshooting a link that  continuously fails and recovers             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 1       6 Advanced troubleshooting  procedures    This chapter contains advanced troubleshooting procedures that are referenced  from the troubleshooting table in the  Troubleshooting chart  chapter     DANGER   Potential service impact   When following troubleshooting procedures for major  failure or potential failures  it is crucial to coordinate local  and regional control centers              The following procedures are described in this chapter   e How to determine the cause of a failed link   e Troubleshooting a facility fault   e Troubleshooting a LIM unit   e Tr
120. are not performing the continuity test  must wait for the  continuity test message from the previous trunk and forward it to the next  office  The continuity indicator is passed through the network in the initial  address message  Figure 4 18 shows this interaction        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 23    Figure 4 18 ISUP continuity on previous trunks                                           IAM IAM IAM   COT IAM  COT on  COT on  not  COT previous previous  required  required  circuit  circuit            _       _      ee a a  i  Continuity loop     lt  ef a   COT    COT  COT  ACM  ACM  ACM  A                                                                                                                                      Double continuity loops   When two consecutive trunks perform a continuity test  the continuity test  message is not sent on the second trunk until it is notified that the first test  passed     Note  This applies to a passed test only  When a test fails  the message is  sent immediately     Glare   Glare occurs when two offices attempt to seize the same trunk at the same time   When glare occurs  the controlling office proceeds as usual with the continuity  test  If the non controlling office has a test in progress  it stops the test and  proceeds as a terminating office     Figure 4 19 shows what happens in glare conditions when both offices try to  conduct continuity tests on the trunk and when on
121. ata show the performance of PMs     Counts peripheral module  PM  errors  faults  and state changes for PMs of the  same type     Counts protocol errors that are detected by the TCAP for each subsystem    Records TCAP usage in terms of messages  transactions  and components for each  subsystem          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    3 4 CCS7 network operational measurements    CCS7 network priority OMs    Table 3 2 lists OMs that must be monitored and their associated performance    factors and logs     Table 3 2 CCS7 network priority OM registers  Sheet 1 of 5     Performance factor    Gateway screening    Link synchronization  failures       OM group  C7GTWSCR    C7LINK1    Register  MSUDSCRD  MSUDSCR2  MSUSCRER  MSURJTM  MSURJOPC  MSURJDPC  MSURUJSI  MSURUJPRI  MSURJCPA  MSURJAPC  MSURJPCS  MSURJDST  MSURJTT    C7ALIGNF  C7EXCONG    Associated logs    CCS500  CCS502  CCS500  CCS502  CCS503  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502  CCS502    CCS101       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network operational measurements 3 5    Table 3 2 CCS7 network priority OM registers  Sheet 2 of 5     Performance factor    Link failures and  recovery    Link reception errors  Link availability    Link congestion       OM group  C7LINK1    C7LINK1  C7LINK1  C7LINK2    Register    C7LKSYNU  C7EXERR  C7NACKRX  C7NUCFL  C7SLTFL  C7LPO  C7LKFAIL  C7EXCONG  C7STALFL  C7COV  C7BSYON  C7RPO  C7ABNRFB  C7ALIGNF  C7TLALFL  C7LKU
122. aulty conditions        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 15    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 14 of 14     Definition    TCAP101 Created when a message is generated by certain faulty conditions     TCAP199 Miscellaneous error conditions        Priority logs  Table 2 2 lists logs that should be monitored  their alarm class  and suggested  treatment     Table 2 2 CCS7 network priority logs  Sheet 1 of 3     Log Alarm class Action       CCS101 minor A hardware or facility fault exists  Deactivate the link and replace the  faulty equipment     CCS103 minor Refer to the Alarm and Performance Monitoring Procedures to determine  the cause of the link alignment failure and synchronize it     CCS109 no alarm Link could not be nailed up  Keep a record of each occurrence    CCS120 no alarm CCS7 link has exceeded threshold values  Monitor the log and alert  support groups    CCS121 no alarm Check other CCS logs that indicate underlying link and linkset failures   Look for a CCS101 or CCS158 link event log  which indicates the root  cause    CCS157 minor Link has been manually busied  Keep a record of each occurrence    CCS158 minor Refer to the Alarm and Performance Monitoring Procedures    for assistance in returning the link to service     CCS159 minor Link has been locally inhibited  Keep a record of each occurrence   CCS160 minor Link has been remotely inhibited  Keep a record of each occurrence   CCS164 minor Refer to the Alarm and Perfo
123. austzone d_region d_austsgpt  CHINA d_chnzone d_exchange d_chnsgpt  GERMAN d_numarea d_hvstd_kvst d_gersgpt  INTL2 d_network d_regiond_group d_member  5  6  7             8  priority d   c_mainarea dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea  8      0     5   priority dpc_mainarea dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea  6      7     9  10  priority dpc_sigpoint dpc_subarea dpc_mainarea opc_sigpoint  10      9     ea eee ee ea ee SN     continued        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 30 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 3 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    INTERCEPT    INTERCEPT    Parameters and  variables    ALL    ANSI    AUSTRIA  BASIC  CCITT       Parameters and variables    1        1    2  opc_netwk sls  2    3    4  BASIC o_pc sls  INTL o_intlzone o_areantw o_intlsgpt  AUSTRIA     o_austzone o_region o_austsgpt  CHINA o_chnzone o_exchange o_chnsgpt  GERMAN o_numarea o_hvst o_kvst o_gersgpt  INTL2 o_network o_region o_group o_ member  5         opc_subarea opc_areaunit sls      8  opc_subarea opc_areaunit sls     0      opc_subarea opc_mainarea sls  continued      1  msg_code DATA hex_bytes   2  PARMS     end     Description    This parameter specifies that the system will intercept all linksets or all network  data     This parameter specifies that the system will intercept all linksets or all network  data     This parameter identifies the format of t
124. ble  replacement  values       Commands manual MAP screen   Underlined  There is no exact method established    WAIT but optional elements  they do not   ae have to be entered  implying defaults    are represented by square brackets     lt circuit gt   0 to 16     A vertical list  Curly brackets  separated by vertical   LINK bars    PM  link   pm   unit    UNIT    Defined in the Description section of Curly brackets   the  Parameters and variables  table   0 to 16        Directory descriptions    Table 7 2 provides a brief description of all directories that this manual  documents  The following chapters describe the commands available from  each directory     Table 7 2 Directory description table          Directory Description   C7RTR The C7RTR directory is an activation command interpreter  Cl  tool used to  monitor external routing    C7RTRQRY The C7RTRQRY directory is used to query external routing    C7SARCRP The C7SARCRP directory is an activation Cl tool used to monitor SCCP  segmentation and reassembly and circular routing prevention functionalities    C7TU The C7TU directory accesses commands that monitor CCS7 messages or links  on link interface units  LIU   The C7TU directory commands can be used on the  service switching point  SSP   signal transfer point  STP   and service control  point  SCP  of the Digital Multiplex System  DMS  product line    C7TUDTC The C7TUDTC  CCS7 test utility digital trunk controller  directory accesses the  digital trunk controller  DTC
125. ble for signaling traffic     The CCS link becomes unavailable for signaling traffic  and traffic has been removed  from the link     The switching office at the far end of the CCS7 link did not obey the CCS7 protocol     ACCS route has received the transfer allowed signal from the network  The route now  has an acceptable level of routing in the CCS network     A CCS route has received the transfer restricted signal from the network  The route  now has a restricted level of routing in the CCS network     A CCS route has received the transfer prohibited signal from the network  The route  now has no service for routing in the network     A CCS route has received an unexpected signal from the network  The signal is  logged and discarded     A CCS routeset has received an invalid level 3 message from the network   A CCS linkset has received an invalid level 3 message from the network     Atransfer controlled signal has been received  and is the result of either a rise or drop  in the congestion level of a routeset           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 6 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 5 of 14     Log  CCS173  CCS174    CCS175    CCS176  CCS177  CCS178  CCS180    CCS181    CCS182    CCS183    CCS184    CCS185    CCS186  CCS188    CCS190    CCS198    CCS199       Definition  The transmission buffer of a CCS link has become congested     Generated when CCS7 messages that originate in the central control communi
126. bsystem  and give them time to clear the problem        If the remote subsystem prob  Do   lem   still exists Step 17  no longer exists Step 18    Cycle the remote subsystem through the offline state        If the remote subsystem prob  Do   lem   still exists Step 15  no longer exists Step 18       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 36 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting remote subsystems  end        15    16    17    18    The problem is with software  and can be resolved by troubleshooting at the  software level        If you Do    have access to PROTEL soft  Step 16  ware listings    do not have access to PROTEL Step 17   sotware listings  Troubleshoot the software or contact the personnel responsible for the next  level of support     Monitor log buffers in the CM  MS  LIM  and link interface unit  LIU  and test  for indications of software problems  such as SWERRS and traps  Debug  software using the debug utility and the PROTEL program listings     For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support     You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 37    Troubleshooting routes and routesets    Application    Definition    Use this procedure to troubleshoot routes or routesets that do not respond to  procedures in other maintenance documents     This procedure troubleshoots routes and routesets from the perspectiv
127. c_mainareaopc_sigpoint   10    continued                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 49  MONITOR  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables       Command    MONITOR    MONITOR    ltem  ALL    ANSI    AUSTRIA  BASIC  CCITT  CHINA  DATA       Parameters and variables        1   1    2  opc_netwk sls  2    3   3    4  BASIC Ope sls   INTL o_intlzone o_areantw o_intlsgpt   AUSTRIA o_austzone o_region o_austsgpt   CHINA o_chnzone o_exchange o_chnsgpt   GERMAN o_numarea o_hvst o_kvst o_gersgpt   INTL2 o_network o_region o_group o_member    opc_subarea opc_areaunit sls  opc_subarea opc_areaunit sls    0 opc_subarea opc_mainarea sls   continued      1  msg_code DATA hex_bytes   2  PARMS    end    Description    This parameter specifies that the system will monitor all linksets or all network data     This parameter specifies that the message to be monitored is network type American  National Standards Institute  ANSI      This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies that the message to be monitored is network type CCITT   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter indicates that new hex data is specified  If the DATA parameter is  used  enter the necessary hex bytes  The message code may be one or two bytes  long and does not necessari
128. cation  module  CC CM  core have invalid destination point codes     ACCS7 route set becomes restricted  when the normal route of the routeset becomes  unavailable   The route becomes unavailable when a transfer prohibited  TFP   message is received for the route  or the route is not in service  linkset is system or  manual busy      The remote service module  RSM  link audit detects an inconsistency in link data   The remote service module  RSM  link audit detects an inconsistency in route data   Generated when offic parm CCS7_HOH1_RCP is changed     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to allowed for the  indicated route     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to restricted for the  indicated route     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to prohibited for the  indicated route     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to unavailable for the  indicated route     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to restricted for the  indicated route     A member of a PPC routeset has changed its availability state to allowed for the  indicated route     A single link event initiates one or more changes to the state of a routeset     This log indicates a signaling message handling  SMH  processor overload condition   This log reports processor overload level changes     A bit error rate test  BERT  is manually stopped or queried from the C7BERT MAP  level  or when a
129. cessive errors at one end office  including signaling information octets   SIO  from the far end office  The far end office receives CCS101 logs        If the logs show Do  an ST failure Step 3  a facility fault Step 5    Change the cards in the CCS7 link interface unit  LIU7   multiple link interface  unit  MLIU   high speed link interface unit  HLIU   or high speed link router   HSLR         If the link problem Do  still exists Step 4  no longer exists Step 6    Verify the LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or HSLR cabling and perform continuity tests on  each lead within the cable     Go to Step 6     Use CCS7 bit error rate test  C7BERT  level of the MAP to test the facility   Replace the faulty component     Return the link to service  Monitor the link s performance until you are sure  the problem is no longer occurring     You have completed this procedure     Figure    Logs generated at end offices by a thrashing A link   shows an  example of the logs generated at end offices by a thrashing A link        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 18 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting a message sink    Application    Use this procedure to troubleshoot a message sink  A message sink occurs  when a node is inappropriately discarding CCS7 messages with no local or  network notification     Definition    The following events indicate that a message sink occurs     There are many customer complaints about not being able to complete  calls     ISUP tra
130. channel bus controller  CBC   which contains integrated circuits to  monitor and control transmission of data through the NIU    e link interface paddle board  LPB   which interfaces with a maximum of  four DS30 datalinks from the network to transmit data to and receive data  from the CBC    Figure 1 16 shows the NIU components and the actions that occur between the  components        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 29    Figure 1 16 NIU components       IPF          F bus 0    wn Channel    bus bus  controller controller          Inter CBC cable  Network plane 0 Network plane 1          The system duplicates NIUs for reliability  Each NIU transmits and receives a  data stream identical to the data stream that the mate NIU receives  The NIU  unit 0 controls C bus 0  and NIU unit 1 controls C bus 1  A cable between the  CBC in each NIU provides access to the other network plane  The cable also  provides a link for coordination and control signals for SWACTs     The F bus provides CM to NIU communication  The system resets NIU and  loads operational software  The NIU receives all maintenance messages  through the F bus     Diagnostics detect hardware problems before diagnostics put the units in the  in service state  Diagnostics respond to problems detected while the NIU  carries traffic  When parity errors occur  the NIU switches to the other plane   When the connection specific integrity values in the data stream are not  correct  the NIU switch
131. code and message type  Or  the  message format can be defined by binding it against a message type     Usage notes    The ALTER command is qualified by the following exceptions  restrictions   and limitations     e Once saved  messages are retained in the message table even if you exit this  MAP level     e The old test message is overwritten with the altered version        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 5  ALTER  continued        Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 3        ALTER command parameters and variables       Command    ALTER    ALTER   continued     Item    default    DATA    dpc_cls    dpc_mem       Parameters and variables       msgnum DATA offset  1   hexbytes  2    LENGTH length  3    PARMS prompt_ans  4    ROUTING label ni default  5    prio dpc_mbr dpc_cls dpc_ntw  6     opc_mbr opc_cls opc_ntw sls  end    Description    Omitting this entry forces the system to default to settings for the priority  DPC   OPC  and SLS data  The default states include the following    The default OPC is datafilled in table C  NETWRK    The default DPC is datafilled in table C7RTESET    The default priority is 0    The default SLS is 0    This parameter changes specific message bytes  If the data parameter is used   you must enter the necessary hex bytes w r t  the message code  The hex bytes    are defaulted to zero  The message co
132. ctory commands 11 13    HELP  Command  HELP  Directory  C7TU  Function    Use the HELP command to receive online documentation for the C7TU  directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       HELP command parameters and variables             Command Parameters and variables   HELP C7TU   Item Description   C7TU This parameter produces summary documentation for the commands in the    C7TU directory              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 14 C7TU directory commands  HELP  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the HELP command       C7TUT          DPC      SGCO          ENTER             C7TUR    C7TURFE    COMMON CHANN    ry    P       D     gt HELP C7TU  MAP response        C   record C7T  RE   print C T    turn on or off       B  List C7LU    QUIT   exit C7TU         Q  lt command    EL SIGNALING  7 TEST       C7TUDTC   access the C7TU DTC tes    U reports fro    routeset sta    message codes       UTILITY    C7TULINK   access the C7TU LINK test environment    t environment    RFC     access the C7TUTRAFFICsimulation environment    m PMS to a device    Ureports recorded on a device       tus change report    name gt  for more information    Explanation This example typifies a response for the HELP command string        MAP responses  The fol
133. d not find data for  lt router number gt      Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 22 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  end        Command responses  Sheet 12 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      PM type of  lt router number gt  is not LIU 7     Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    10 1       10 C7SARCRP directory commands    C7SARCRP directory commands    Use the C7SARCRP directory to access the C7SARCRP activation CI tool   Use this tool to monitor SCCP segmentation and reassembly and circular  routing prevention functionalities        Accessing the C7SARCRP directory  To access the C7SARCRP directory level  enter the following command from  the CI  command interpreter  level      gt C7SARCRP  and press the Enter key     C7SARCRP directory commands    The following commands are available at the C7SARCRP directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e HELP   e QUIT   e SET   e STATUS       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    10 2 C7SARCRP directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   C7SARCRP  Function    Use the HELP command to dis
134. de may be one or two bytes long and does  not necessarily follow the routing label immediately     This variable specifies the DPC cluster number of the message to alter  The valid  entry range is 0 to 255  Entering 0 alters all clusters     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the message to alter  The  valid entry range is 0 to 255   Entering 0 alters all members         DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 6 C7TULINK directory commands    ALTER  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 3     ALTER command parameters and variables       Command    dpc_netwk    hexbytes    label    LENGTH    length    msg_num    ni    offset    opc_cls    opc_mem    opc_netwk    PARMS    prio       Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the DPC area network of the message to alter  The valid  entry range is 0 to 255   Entering 0 alters all area networks      This variable string specifies the new hex bytes of the message body  The  existing bytes are overridden in the message     This variable specifies the routing label used in the CCS7 message  The valid  values are ANSI  CCITT  JPN  or TTC     This parameter changes the length of a message identified by the message  number     This variable specifies the new length of the message identified by message  number  The valid entry range is 0 to 256     This variable specifies the message number of the selected message  The valid  entry range is 0 to 7     This variable specifies
135. destination node do not  generate this log when they receive an MRVT message     Log OMAP210 generates when an intermediate node or a test destination node  detects an error during a message transfer part  MTP  routing verification test   MRVT      Log OMAP230 generates at the initiating signaling point under the following  conditions     e when all expected MTP message routing verification acknowledgments  MRVA   are received    e when the MTP routing verification test  MRVT  T1 timer expires    Log OMAP 240 generates each time a signaling point  SP  that detects an error sends  a message transfer part  MTP  routing verification result  MRVR  message to the test  initiating SP  Failed and successful trace results are reported by the destination SP   when a trace request is made by the originating signaling transfer point  STP      A PM status is changed to system busy by a system request     A PM is placed offline from a manual busy state  or when a PM is added to its  associated inventory table while offline and unequipped     A PM state is changed from offline to unequipped  or when a tuple is deleted from  tables LTCRINV or LIUINV     A PM state changes to manual busy    A PM returns to service    A PM state changes to in service trouble    A maintenance action step has occurred in a PM   A PM P side link state changes to manual busy   A PM P side link state changes to system busy     A PM P side link returns to service     Created when a message is generated by certain f
136. dures  described in this document are for  maintenance personnel in an  operating company           Note  The xxxx in the document number represents the product  computing module load  PCL         297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Maintenance summary 1 31    Table 1 8 CCS7 documeniation  Sheet 2 of 2     Document Title Abstract  297 Xxxx 546 Routine Maintenance This document contains routine  Procedures maintenance procedures  The    procedures described in this  document are for maintenance  personnel in an operating    company   297 XXxx 547 Card Replacement This document contains card  Procedures replacement procedures  The    procedures described in this  document are for maintenance  personnel in an operating  company     PLN 8991 104 Provisioning Manual This document describes how the  DMS SP SSP operates and the  hardware and software required to  operate the DMS SP SSP     Note  The xxxx in the document number represents the product  computing module load  PCL                  DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 1       2 CCS7 network logs       Logs    This chapter contains background information on logs  the log groups and logs  associated with a CCS7 network and references indicating for additional  information     Logs are messages generated by the DMS switch when a significant event  occurs  Logs include status and activity reports  reports on hardware or  software faults  test results  changes in state  and other events or c
137. e     Displays the MATCH table  which contains entries specifying  selection criteria for monitoring and intercepting messages    Displays help for C7TULINK commands  Intercepts specified CCS7 messages  see Note     Changes specified bytes in the Mask array in MASK table  entries    Changes specified bytes in the Match array in MATCH table  entries    Monitors for specified CCS7 messages  Quits from C7TULINK level back to C7TU level    Removes a monitor or intercept request from the MATCH  table  a message from the message table  or a link that was  previously selected with the SELECT command    Restores the message table to the link interface unit  LIU   following a restart in the central controller    Selects up to four LIUs for monitoring and intercepting  messages on associated links     Takes a message from the message table and injects it into  a link  see Note     Displays the status of the C7TULINK environment    Note  These commands are visible and available only if the ILPT7 password is    The C7TU match table contains up to eight entries that specify criteria for  monitoring or intercepting CCS7 messages        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       4 4 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 1 shows an example of a match table entry  There are two 16 byte  hexadecimal arrays  The Match array is the value  and the Mask array indicates  which bytes are important  The first 16 bytes of incoming messages are  compared to the matc
138. e     Figure 4 9 Example of the MASK command        gt MASK 0 4 00  MAP display  C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC SLS TYPE  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET  0 IN ANSI NATL 00 SNTS 003 002 001 006 005 004 07 SLTM    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8  9 LOBE  124 13 J14 15    Match  00 04 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 17 OO O00 00    Mask  00 FF 00 00 OF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC SLS TYPE  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET   0 IN ANSI NATL 00 SNTS 003 002 001 006 005 004 07 SLIM    OF We 2 3 4 5 6 To uge 9   LOLI L2 T3 TA 15    Match  00 04 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 17 OO 00 00  Mask  00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00             Building CCS7 messages   If you have access to the password protected C7TULINK_ILPT7  you can add  CCS7 messages to the message table and send them over a link to test the effect  on a piece of equipment and to test the messaging process itself        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 14 Trouble isolation and correction methods    The maximum number of entries in the message table is eight  Messages are  retained in the table when you exit from the C7TU        CAUTION   Do not enter message tracing criteria during an existing  tracing session   Entering C7TULINK message tracing criteria is prohibited  when any other message tracing is in progress  This  restriction applies to C7TULINK  C7MON  and SIGRTU                 Use the message table as follows       To make an entry to the
139. e  local SCMG subsystem  The message is discarded     The status of a remote point code is changed to offline from the MAP terminal   The status of a remote point code is changed to manual busy from the MAP terminal     The status of a remote point code that has been returned to service changes to  system busy  This log indicates the number of subsystems at each remote point code  that changed state to system busy     The status of a remote point code changes to available   The status of a remote subsystem is changed to offline from the MAP terminal   The status of a remote subsystem is changed to manual busy from the MAP terminal     The status of a remote subsystem changes to initializing  and occurs when the  subsystem has been returned to service  but its routing status has not been obtained   and a subsystem status test  SST  is in progress on that remote subsystem     The status of a remote subsystem changes to system busy  Occurs when the  subsystem has been returned to service  but its routing status becomes prohibited   and an SST on the remote subsystem is in progress     A remote subsystem becomes available     The status of a local subsystem changes to offline        The status of a local subsystem changes to manual busy        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 8 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 7 of 14     Log   CCS219  CCS220  CCS221    CCS222    CCS223    CCS224    CCS225    CCS226    CCS227    CCS
140. e F bus problem Do  still exists Step 7  no longer exists Step 10       Unseat the F bus interface cards  NTEX22  one shelf at a time  Try to bring  the F bus back into service before going on to the next shelf  Continue to  unseat cards on each shelf until you have brought the F bus back into service  or until you have unseated cards on all the shelves        If the F bus problem Do  still exists Step 8  no longer exists Step 10    Replace the F bus ribbon cable        If the F bus problem Do  still exists Step 9  no longer exists Step 10    For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support     You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Application    Definition    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 27    Troubleshooting links and linksets    Use this procedure to to troubleshoot links and linksets that do not respond to  trouble clearing procedures in other maintenance procedures     A signaling link consists of signaling terminal equipment and a transmission  facility  Signaling links are used for the exchange of information between  nodes in a CCS7 network     A linkset is a set of links that are used as a group to carry signaling traffic  between two signaling points in a network     Link and linkset problems can be due to the transmission facility  an  application specific unit  ASU   or software problems     Common procedures    Action    None    Follow the steps to perform the procedure  
141. e Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       8 6 C7RTR directory commands    DEACTIVATE  continued     Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the DEACTIVATE command       MAP output Meaning and action       External Routing is already inactive in the office  Do you want to  re deactivate External Routing              Please confirm   YES    Y    NO   or  N     Meaning  External routing is already inactive  The CCS7 DTCs route ISUP  messages   Action  If you want to deactivate external routing again  enter y  yes   If you    do not want to deactivate external routing again  enter n  no      The MTP tables must be added to the CCS7 DTCs before External Routing can  be deactivated        Meaning  External routing is not deactivated   Action  Use the DOWNLOAD_MTP command to add the MTP tables to the  CCS7 DTCs           There ar xpanded routesets in the office  External Routing cannot be  deactivated until all the expanded routesets have been removed        Meaning  External routing is not deactivated    Action  Remove all expanded routesets and enter the command again   There are CCS7 DTCs in transient states    Meaning  External routing is not deactivated     Action  Use the QUERY_EXT_ ROUTING command to list which DTCs are  in a transient state     External Routing activation data was not distributed successfully to all  nodes        Meaning  External routing is not deactivated    Action  Use the ACTIVATE command to 
142. e command again   No reply from  lt DTC number gt   Reason   lt explanation gt     Meaning  External routing information is not displayed because there is no  reply from  lt DTC number gt      Action  Enter the command again     The DPC could not be obtained from the routeset  Failed to construct a test  CCS7 message     Meaning  The destination point code is not in the routeset   Action  Refer to table C7RTESET for the correct routeset     The OPC could not be obtained from the routeset  Failed to construct a test  CCS7 message     Meaning  The originator point code is not in the routeset   Action  Refer to table C7RTESET for the correct routeset        External Routing  lt external routing state gt  Current Routing path  SLS  lt   gt    Could not find LIU7 data  Check for SWERRs LOGs                   297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 19  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Command responses  Sheet 9 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        Mismatch of Ext  Routing Status  Inactive in CM  active in XPM     Meaning  External routing information is not displayed  Use  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING to examine the external routing status     Action  None       Mismatch of Ext  Routing Status  Active in CM  inactive in XPM     Meaning  External routing informatjion is not displayed  Use  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING to examine
143. e enter the command              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 21    QUIT  Command  QUIT  Directory  C7RTR  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit out of the C7RTR directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response        C7RTR Tool Ended  GES   gt     Explanation  You have exited out of the C7RTR directory           Responses  None       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 22 C7RTR directory commands    REMOVE _MTP  Command   REMOVE_MTP  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the REMOVE_MTP command to remove message transfer part  MTP   routing tables from the digital trunk controllers  DTCs   Any changes to MTP  routing tables are not included in the CCS7 DTCs     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the REMOVE_MTP command        gt REMOVE_MTP  MAP response           MTP Databases are being removed  The procedure will be completed when th  CCS7 DTCs are stable     Explanation  MTP table information is removed from the CCS7 DTCs        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2           Responses for the REMOVE_MTP command       MAP output Meaning and act
144. e network type of the message to be intercepted  is Telecommunications Technical Committee  TTC               DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 38 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the INTERCEPT command        gt INT LINK Is000177 0 BOTH ANSI ALL snm DATA 01 03 06  where    1s000177  is the linkset name    0  is the signaling link number    BOTH  is the direction of the message    ANSI  is the network type    ALL  is the routing label    snm  is the message code    01 03 06  are the hex bytes added to the message body    MAP response   INT match entry setup successfully    Explanation  This command intercepts the incoming and outgoing messages of link ls000177 for  SNM data        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 3           Responses for the INTERCEPT command       MAP output Meaning and action    ALL IS NOT PERMITTED IN FIELD ENVIRONMENT                         Meaning  You specified parameter ALL in a field for which this is not a valid entry   Command INTERCEPT did not execute     Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 39  INTERCEPT  continued        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 3     Responses for the INTERCEPT command       MAP output Meaning and action    ERROR  INVALID LINK NUMBER          
145. e of  routes  because the status of a routeset depends directly on the availability of  its component routes     This procedure describes how to troubleshoot associated and quasi   associated  routes  The trouble clearing approach is slightly different depending upon the  type of route     An associated route uses a linkset directly connected to the destination  signaling point     A quasi   associated route uses a linkset that is indirectly connected to the  destination signaling point  It is connected to another STP switch which is then  connected to the destination signaling point     Common procedures    Action    None    Follow the steps to perform the procedure   Troubleshooting routes and routesets    At your current location  1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary        If the route or routeset problem Do    still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 26  2 Post the routeset and verify the status of its component routes   If Do  all routes are in service Step 10  routes are ISTb or SysB Step 3          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 38 Advanced troubleshooting procedures  Troubleshooting routes and routesets  continued     3 Determine if the component linksets of the ISTb or SysB route are in service   If the linksets are Do  available Step 6    not available Step 4       4 Perform the procedure Troubleshooting links and linksets  in this chapter  then return to this point   Go to step 5    5 Check the status o
146. ected and make sure that traffic volume on affected  links is low to avoid service disruptions        Figure 4 3  4 4  and 4 5 show examples of the MONITOR command  For an  explanation of match table entries and log output  refer to the  Match table  and   C7TU output  sections in this chapter     Figure 4 3 shows the commands required to monitor messages between  originating point code  OPC  network 1  cluster 2  member 3  and destination  point code  DPS  network 4  cluster 5  member 6 with signaling link selector   SLS  7           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 7    Figure 4 3 Example of monitoring messages between a specific originating  point code and destination point code       PARMS 01 10    gt  DUMP 0   MAP display   C7TU MON   NUM DIR NET  0 IN ANSI    Oo 1    Match   Mask        NI  NATL  2 3  00  00    00  00    SIO  PR  SI  00 SNTS  4 5 6   82   FF    03  FF    02  FF    DPC   MEM CLU  003 002  7 8  42   01 06   FF FF    05  FF    NET  001    10    04  FF    Tr    07  1F    12    Ll  FF    MEM  006  13    10  FF    OPC  CLU  005  14  01  FF     gt MONITOR LINK LINKSET1 1 IN ANSI LABEL NATL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SLTM    15    00  00    SLS TYPE  NET  004 07 SLIM          Figure 4 4 shows the commands required to monitor all messages from OPC  network 4  cluster 5  member 6  with SLS 7     Figure 4 4 Example of monitoring messages from a specific OPC        gt  DUMP 1  MAP display    C7TU MON  NUM DIR NET  0 IN ANSI  
147. ed        Command responses  Sheet 5 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  External routing is active  Router  lt router numbers is discarding  messages because the routeset is unavailable     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt    DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to     Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt        Router  lt   gt  Discarding Msgs  NIL Routeset    Meaning  External routing is active  Router  lt router numbers is discarding  messages because there is a NIL routeset     Action  None       External routing  Active   Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to    Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt     Router  lt   gt   Message discard occurred     Meaning  External routing is active  Router  lt router number gt  is discarding  messages  possibly due to router congestion     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt    DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to     Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt        Routing translation failed in Router  lt   gt               DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       9 16 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Command responses  Sheet 6 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  External routing is active  Comm
148. edure is in progress     LIU auto imaging has been initiated     Log CCS149 is generated to indicate the following    e auto imaging is finished and succeeded   e auto imaging was unsuccessful due to an internal error   e auto imaging was unsuccessful due to an exceeded delta file threshold    e auto imaging is disabled    A CCS routeset has been placed offline           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 5    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 4 of 14     Log  CCS152  CCS153    CCS154    CCS155    CCS156  CCS157  CCS158  CCS159  CCS160  CCS161  CCS162  CCS163  CCS164    CCS165  CCS166    CCS167    CCS168    CCS169    CCS170  CCS171  CCS172       Definition  A CCS routeset has been manually busied     A routeset return to service  RTS  command has passed but not all parts of the  routeset are functioning enough to provide service     ACCS routeset is unavailable to deliver traffic to its destination  and all traffic to that  destination has been stopped     ACCS routeset is able to deliver traffic to its destination  and all traffic to that  destination has been restored     A CCS link has been placed offline    A CCS link has been manually busied    A CCS link is system busied after a request for return to service  RTS  fails   A CCS link has been locally inhibited    A CCS link has been remotely inhibited    Local inhibit on a CCS link has been removed    The remote inhibit on a CCS link has been removed    The CCS link becomes availa
149. eived  the fault is in another network node     If this log occurs check other CCS logs and alarms which indicate  underlying link and linkset failures and correct  Look specifically for a  CCS010  CCS157 or CCS158 link event log which will indicate the root  cause     Display the affected routeset at the C7LKSET MAP level  Review the  status of the member links and attempt to bring unavailable links to an  in service  InSv  state     Display the affected linkset at the C7LKSET MAP level  Execute  command    Query Usr    to display the routesets which use the linkset     An invalid SCCP message has been received and discarded  Set  threshold to monitor     SCCP message received with invalid called party address  Set threshold  to monitor originating mode     SCCP message received with invalid calling party address  Set threshold  to monitor originating node     SCCP message received with invalid subsystem destination  Set  threshold to monitor originating node     Invalid SCCP message received from local subsystem  Set threshold to  monitor subsystem     Invalid SCCP management message received by the local SCMG  subsystem  Set threshold to monitor originating node     SCMG received and SST message with an invalid calling party address   Set threshold to monitor originating node        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 17    Table 2 2 CCS7 network priority logs  Sheet 3 of 3     Log Alarm class Action   CCS230 no alarm SCCP subsystem received an 
150. em displays all C7TULINK test messages in the message table     Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses    Responses for the DISPLAY command       MAP output Meaning and action          MESSAGE NUMBER  lt msg gt  HAS NOT BEEN BUILT YET                            Meaning  The command failed because the specified message has not been built     Action  None          THERE ARE NO C7TU MESSAGES BUILT                         Meaning No messages exist in the message table     Action None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 22 C7TULINK directory commands    DUMP  Command   DUMP  Directory   C7TU C7TULINK  Function    Use the DUMP command to display the match table and examine the criteria  used in monitor and intercept requests for C7TU messages     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       DUMP command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables   DUMP item_no   Item Description   item_no This variable specifies the number of the match table entry to be displayed  The    valid entry range is 0 to 7  To display several match table entries enter each item  number separated with a space              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 23  DUMP  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command 
151. em name    Item Description       subsystem_name _ This variable specifies the subsystem or subsystems to be queried  The values  are the subsystem name or ALL              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7SARCRP directory commands 10 9  STATUS  continued        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the STATUS command        gt STATUS E800   where   E800 is the subsystem_name  MAP response     SUBSYSTEMSAR STATECRP STATE                   E800 ON OFF    Explanation The SAR functionality is enabled for subsystem E800              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the STATUS command                      MAP output Meaning and action  SUBSYSTEM SAR STATE CRP STATE  E800 ON OFF    Meaning  The SAR functionality is enabled for subsystem E800   Action  None       ERROR  Subsystem provided is not datafilled in table C7LOCSSN       Meaning  The subsystem is not datafilled in table C7LOCSSN     Action  Refer to table C7LOCSSN to determine which subsystems are datafilled  on the node              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       10 10 C7SARCRP directory commands  STATUS  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the STATUS command             MAP output Meaning and action   Warning The TELOO009 option is currently idle  The state of SAR or  CRP functionality of each subsystem 
152. ent     Refer to the  Trouble isolation and correction methods  chapter which  provides a brief description of C7TU and its commands                 If SST messages are Do  being sent Step 6  not being sent Step 12  6 Determine if the SST messages are being acknowledged by subsystem  allowed  SSA  messages   If SST messages are Do  being acknowledged Step 7  not being acknowledged Step 9  7 Verify the coding of the SSA messages   If the coding is Do  correct Step 8  not correct Step 13  8 Cycle the links receiving the SSAs through the offline state   If the subsystem problem Do  still exists Step 12  no longer exists Step 18       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 35    Troubleshooting remote subsystems  continued        10    11    12    13    14    Verify the coding of the subsystem test message using C7TU     If the coding is Do  correct Step 13  not correct Step 10       Verify the datafill in table C7NETSSN again  because the datafill in table  C7NETSSN controls the coding of the SST messages           If the datafill is Do   correct Step 12   not correct Step 11  Correct the datafill    If the subsystem problem Do   still exists Step 12   no longer exists Step 18    The cause of the problem is a software error   Cycle the remote point code through the offline state        If the remote subsystem prob  Do   lem   still exists Step 14  no longer exists Step 18    Notify the personnel responsible for maintenance of the remote su
153. entry  range for is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 intercepts all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     O to 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 intercepts all subareas   0 to 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 intercepts all subareas   0 to 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 intercepts all subareas     This parameter specifies that for some message codes the system will generate  a list of parameters available to the user     This variable specifies the CCS7 priority of the message to be intercepted  The  valid entry range is 0 to 4  The entry of 4 specifies all priorities     This variable specifies the signaling link number of the linkset to be intercepted   The valid entry range is 0 to 15           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000          C7TULINK directory commands 12 37          INTERCEPT  continued   Parameters and variables  Sheet 10 of 10   INTERCEPT command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  sls This variable specifies the signaling link selector code of the test message  The    valid entry ranges are     0 to 32 for ANSI messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages   0 to 16 for CCITT messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages   0 to 16 for TTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages    0 to 32 for JPN messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages     0 to 16 for NTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages     TTC This parameter specifies that th
154. eptable match  the rest of the  entries are not evaluated for a match  Ensure that your match entries are not  screened by another user s entry     Before you use the MONITOR command  use the SELECT command to  enable message monitoring on the appropriate peripheral modules  PM         DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 48 C7TULINK directory commands    MONITOR  continued     Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 8                                                        MONITOR command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  MONITOR  ALL direction ANSI ALL  1   LINK lset_name slink_code LABEL netwk_indicator  2   CCITT ALL  3   ABEL netwk_indicator  4   TIC ALL  5   ABEL netwk_indicator  6   JPN ALL  7   ABEL netwk_indicator  8   NTC ALL  9   LABEL netwk_indicator  10    continued   MONITOR   continued   1  PODENI Ch    2  priority dpc_mem dpc_cluster dpc_netwk opc_mem opc_cluster   2    3   3    4  priority BASIC d_pc  4   INTL d_intlzone d_areantw d_intlsgpt  AUSTRIA d_austzone d_region d_austsgpt  CHINA d_chnzone d_exchange d_chnsgpt  GERMAN d_numarea d_hvst d_kvst d_gersgpt  INTL2 d_network d_region d_group d_member   5   5    6  priority dpc_mainarea dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea   6    7   7    8  priority dpc_mainarea dpc_subarea dpc_areaunit opc_mainarea   8    9   9    10  priority dpc_sigpoint dpc_subarea dp
155. erify the message code and retry the MONITOR command with a correct  message code        Only four monitors allowed in field environment    Meaning  Four entries already exist in the match table  The field environment allows  only four entries in the match table  The MONITOR command exits     Action  Remove an existing monitor or monitor request and retry the MONITOR  command     SLS is updated with the least significant 4 bits of the CIC          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 58 C7TULINK directory commands  MONITOR  end        Command responses  Sheet 3 of 3     Responses for the MONITOR command       WARNING     WARNING     WARNING        MAP output    User entered    Meaning and action    Meaning  The command executed successfully  The message appears when  telephone user part  TUP   telephone user part plus  TUPP   or British telephone  user part  BTUP  messages are involved  In these message types  the signaling link  selector  SLS  value is derived from the four least significant bits of the carrier  identification code  CIC  value  The SLS value entered in the routing label is  overwritten     Action  None  data longer than match entry size truncating user data     Meaning  The match entry has been truncated to contain bytes 3 to 18 of the  message unit  inclusively  Each match entry is 16 bytes long     Action  None    C7TU is not enabled in any PMs    Meaning  The command executed and the request was added to the match table     
156. ernal routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Inconsistent data for Link  lt index  gt   Check for SWERRs LOGs       Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find routeset data  lt index  gt      Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 21  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Command responses  Sheet 11 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Routeset  lt index  gt  is not datafilled     Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find the routeset name with  lt index  gt         Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Could not find linkset name for linkset  lt index number gt     Meaning  Command could not complete     Action  Contact the next level of support        External Routing   lt external routing state gt   Current Routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Coul
157. ers     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Unknown routing error occured in DTC  lt   gt      Meaning  External routing is active  An unknown routing error occured     Action  None       External routing  Active   Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     Command failed in CM  Unknown error    Meaning  External routing is active  Command could not complete     Action  None  This command can run at most once per minute  Please try again     Meaning  The command was entered too soon     Action  Try the command again     Only DTC and PDTC are supported in this tool           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       9 18 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Command responses  Sheet 8 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  An incorrect parameter was entered     Action  Enter the correct DTC or PDTC parameter number   DTC  lt number gt  is not datafilled     Meaning  The digital trunk controller number entered is not datafilled     Action  Retry the command with a valid DTC number   Could not get internal data for  lt DTC number gt      Meaning  External routing information is not displayed because the data  for the DTC number is not available     Action  Enter the command again   Send test CCS7 message to  lt DTC number gt  failed  Reason   lt explanation gt      Meaning  The test message was not sent     Action  Enter th
158. ervice       Meaning  You selected an LIU number that is not in service  Monitoring starts when  the LIU comes in service  The SELECT command continues execution     Action  None          Only four selects allowed in FIELD environment    Meaning  You attempted to select when four entries were already in the match  table  The field environment allows only four entries in the match table  The SELECT  command exits     Action  Release a link that is currently selected and retry the SELECT command   Select done    Meaning  The specified LIU number has been selected     Action  None       ALL is not permitted in a FIELD environment     Meaning  You specified parameter ALL in a field for which this is not a valid entry   Command SELECT did not execute     Action  Enter the command again  Indicate specific values for the variables                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes  None    C7TULINK directory commands 12 67    SEND    SEND    C7TULINK    Use the SEND command to take the specified message from the message table  and inject it into the given link  Once a message is sent  the system treats it the  same way as any other CCS7 message     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables    SEND command parameters and variables       Command    SEND    ltem    IN    link_num    linkset  msg_num    OUT       Parameters and variables    msg_
159. es           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 15    BUILD  continued           Parameters and variables  Sheet 5 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables       INTL  INTL2    JPN    LABEL  msg_code    netwk_indicator    NTC    O_areantw    o_austsgpt    o_austzone    o_chnsgpt    o_chnzone    o_exchange    o_gersgpt    GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  JAPAN     This parameter allows the user to input the network data of the message   This variable specifies the type of message     This variable specifies the network indicator of the message  The valid entries are  as follows     e INTL   e INTLSP  e NATL   e NATLSP  e ALL    This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  NTC7     This variable specifies the originating point code  OPC  area network of the CCITT  message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256  monitors all area networks     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all signal  points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA   The valid entry range
160. es routing around faults        performs logical address routing    Provides additional functions to accommodate two types of  services  without connection and connection oriented   Performs the following functions     e Management control        updates routing and translations based on traffic  congestion  failure  and recovery at the point code or  subsystem number level        keeps track of application status and informs the user  when an application is not available    e Message handler      transfers signaling data units      initiates global title translation  GTT         routes messages through the network and within the  node  based on the subsystem number        checks the status of the destination  and routes  messages to MTP routing  ISUP routing  or subsystem  number routing          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 6 Maintenance summary    Table 1 1 Functions of CCS7 protocol layers  Sheet 2 of 2   Layer Function    TCAP Provides a set of generic procedures for applications based on  transactions  Controls the not circuit related information  transfer between two or more nodes in a network     ISUP Provides the signaling that sets up  monitors  and takes CCS7  calls down on ISUP trunks  Supplies trunk signaling capabilities  that allow network wide feature transparency for CCS7  applications like integrated services digital network  ISDN         CCS7 signaling messages  CCS7 is a packet switched network based on the exchange of in
161. es the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the DPC command    MAP output Meaning and action          ERROR  CANNOT FIND DPC    Meaning  The DPC command was unable to find the destination point code   DPC  associated with the routeset  The command halts execution  No  messages will be printed     Action  Verify that the routeset name ID is datafilled in the C7RTESET table   Retry the command with the correct routeset name           ERROR  INVALID ROUTESET NAME                Meaning  The user specified a routeset name that is not datafilled in the  C7RTESET table  The command halts execution  No messages will be printed     Action  Retry the command with a valid routeset name           ERROR  QUERY FAILED          Meaning  The QUERY command was unable to query the DPC associated with  the routeset  The command halts execution  No messages will be printed        Action  Verify the routeset and retry the QUERY command              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 12 C7TU directo  DPC  end     ry commands       Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the DPC command       MAP output    INVALID DPC OP    Meaning and action          ERATION    Meaning  The user has specified an operation that is not allowed with the DPC  command  The command halts execution  No messages will be printed     Action  Retry the DPC command with the correct options           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TU dire
162. es the system to default to exiting one directory level   This  is the most common selection for exiting nonmenu directories    ALL This parameter causes the system to exit all directories and returns you to the Cl  level   n_level This variable specifies the number of directory levels to exit  The default value is  1   name This variable specifies the particular directory level from which you want to exit              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 18 C7TU directory commands  QUIT  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response     Crs    Explanation You entered the QUIT command to exit a directory that is accessed directly from the Cl  level  The system assumes the default value of one directory level and returns you to the Cl level              MAP responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the QUIT command    MAP output Meaning and action       CE     Meaning  You have returned to the Cl MAP level     Action  Access another directory from the Cl MAP level or end this session   QUIT    Increment not found    Meaning  The system did not recognize the name variable replacement value  as a valid directory level     Action  Verify your entry  If the name you entered is incorrect  retry the  command  If the name is correct  check to see if the environment is active or if 
163. es to the other plane        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 30 Maintenance summary    DMS documentation    Table 1 8 contains a list of CCS7 documentation  For more information on the  CCS7 documentation  refer to the Product Documentation Directory     297 899 1 001     Table 1 8 CCS7 documeniation  Sheet 1 of 2        Document    297 8121  020    297 XxXxx 350    297 xxxx 543    297 xxxx 544    297 xxxx 545    Title    DMS SuperNode  Signaling Transfer Point  Service Guide    Translations Guide    Alarm andPerformance  Monitoring Procedures    Trouble Locating and  Clearing Procedures    Recovery Procedures    Abstract    This document contains reference  information for the Signaling  Engineering  And Administration  System  SEAS   Information  includes the effect of SEAS  commands on the DMS STP  switch  and a summary of interface  messages that report DMS STP  events to SEAS     This document describes the  translations datafill and data  schema tables  This document is  designed for use by the  administration personnel     This document contains alarm and  performance monitoring  maintenance procedures  The  procedures described in this  document are for maintenance  personnel in an operating  company     This document contains trouble  locating and clearing maintenance  procedures  The procedures  described in this document are for  maintenance personnel in an  operating company     This document contains recovery  procedures  The proce
164. etected a problem with a table  The log displays the table  and  the system action taken     Log703 is generated when a distribute data manager  DDM  audit on the internal  c _feature_activation_table has detected and corrected a mismatch between the  computer module  CM  and the LIU     A DDM audit has failed for a particular xlist block on a node  The specified xlist block  is in use by the routeset     A DDM audit has failed for a particular xlist block on a node  The specified xlist block  is in use by the route of the routeset        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 11    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 10 of 14     Log  CCS732  CCS733    CCS734  CCS735  CCS791    C7TU logs  C7TU101    C7TU102    C7TU103  C7TU104    C7TU105    C7TU106  C7TU108  C7TU109  C7TU110  C7TU401    C7UP logs  C7UP100  C7UP101  C7UP102  C7UP103       Definition  Asummary log indicating the number of DDM audits that have failed in the last 2 min     Asummary log indicating the CCS180 to CCS185 logs that have been suppressed in  the last 2 min     The xlist table has overflowed while attempting to add a member   Indicates that xlist management has been enabled or disabled on the node     A summary log generated every hour detailing the audit activity for the MTP ISUP  tables     There is a match between the incoming link message from the LIU or the MSB7 and  the C7TU match table     There is a match between the outgoing link message to the LIU or the MSB7
165. etry the INTERCEPT  command           pij    EAST SIGNIFICANT 4 BITS OF THE CIC       SLS IS UPDATED WITH THE                      DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 40 C7TULINK directory commands  INTERCEPT  end        Command responses  Sheet 3 of 3     Responses for the INTERCEPT command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  The command executed successfully  The message appears when  telephone user part  TUP   telephone user part plus  TUPP   or British telephone  user part  BTUP  messages are involved  In these message types  the signaling link  selector  SLS  value is derived from the four least significant bits of the carrier  identification code  CIC  value  The SLS value entered in the routing label is  overwritten     Action  None          USER ENTERED DATA LONGER THAN MATCH ENTRY SIZE TRUNCATING USER DATA                          Meaning  The match entry has been truncated to contain bytes 3 to 18 of the  message unit  inclusively  Each match entry is 16 bytes long     Action  None    WARNING  C7TU IS NOT ENABLED IN ANY PMS             Meaning  The command executed and the request was added to the match table     Action  Use the SELECT command to enable the C7TU in the peripheral modules  that are to be used              WARNING  C7TU IS NOT ENABLED ON  lt pm num gt  WHERE THIS LINK RESIDES                      Meaning  The INTERCEPT command executed  and the request was added to the  match table     Action  Use the SELECT
166. example       Example of the DUMP command        gt DUMP 1  where    1  is the match table entry to be displayed                         MAP response   Number of valid match entries   3  C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET SLS TYPE  O BOTH ANSI 2 00 5 1 2 3 0 0 0 0 IAM       Oo dy 2 3 ae D 6 OT g 910  VA 12 ID LA TLG       Match  00 04 00 00 82 01 01 01 00 00 00 O00 01  Mask  00 FF 00 00 CF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 1F    Explanation  The system provides a display of match table entry 1           Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses    Responses for the DUMO command       MAP output Meaning and action          ERROR  FIRST ITEM MUST NOT BE GREATER THAN LAST ITEM                      Meaning  You attempted to display a range in which the first item had a larger entry  number in the match table than the last item  The DUMP command exits     Action  Verify the start and stop numbers  and retry the command with a correct  range     There are no valid match entries in the specified range     Meaning  There are no match entries in the specified range  The command halts  execution and messages are not displayed     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 24 C7TULINK directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   C7TULINK  Function    Use the HELP command to receive online documentation for the C7TULINK  directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters
167. exceeded  access the  OM2 log buffer in the LOGUTIL subsystem to obtain the number of the          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    CCS7 network operational measurements 3 9    register that is generating the alarm  The log buffer OM2 display shows the  register number  the associated threshold setting  and the actual event peg  count     OM class assignment reports    Customized OM class assignment reports are available to assist in CCS7  maintenance and surveillance  The following reports are applicable to a CCS7  network     e STP_HRLY Key OM data  including both SuperNode and CCS7   Printed hourly when maintenance personnel are present    e STP_DAY Analysis of this OM data assists in identification of  chronic or marginal conditions that can only be diagnosed  over a long time interval    e 7_SPMS_D This CCS7 data is used to resolve problems identified  by the daily SPMS process that requires the source OM    data to be analyzed        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 1       4 Trouble isolation and correction  methods    This chapter describes maintenance tools for a CCS7 network     The    CCS7 network test tools    section describes test tools you can use when  performing maintenance on the DMS CCS7 network     The    Tracking software related problems    section describes reports that track  software related troubles     CCS7 network test tools    The following test tools are described in this section     e CCS7 test utility  C7T
168. f resource shortages    Generated after a continuity check test on the indicated outgoing trunk     A response has not been received to either a facility request message or an  information request message after a specified period of time     The state of an ISUP trunk is being changed to match the far end    The far end office does not use the same protocol standard message format   An outgoing call attempt fails    A call in progress has received an unexpected ISUP message type    An ISUP trunk detects a maintenance problem     ISUP does not receive a response from the far end to a release circuit  REL  or reset  circuit  RSC  message before a timeout occurs     The ISUP message table has no space available to store group blocking or group  RSC messages     The ISUP trunks are blocked due to an outage on digital trunk controller No  7  DTC7    a DTC7 carrier  or an interperipheral message link  IPML      The previously blocked ISUP trunk is unblocked due to the recovery of the DTC7  the  DTC7 carrier  or an IPML     An invalid number has been received in the range field of a circuit group message   For the ANSI ISUP protocol  an invalid number is zero or a number greater than 23   For other types of networks  an invalid number is zero  or a number greater than 255     A history data block  HDB  was not allocated due to under provisioning  Also  indicates that sufficient data store cannot be allocated to update the number of buffers  available for maintenance messages     A s
169. f the route or routeset problem     If the route or routeset problem Do          still exists Step 6  no longer exists Step 26  6 Verify datafill tables for MTP related problems   e C7NETWRK  e C7RTESET  e C7LKSET  e C7LINK  If the datafill is Do  correct Step 8  not correct Step 7  7 Correct the datafill     Determine if the route problem still exists           If the route Do  remains ISTb or SysB Step 8  is in service Step 24   8 Determine if the route is associated or quasi   associated   If the route is Do  associated Step 9  quasi   associated Step 11       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 39    Troubleshooting routes and routesets  continued        10    11    12    13    14    Cycle the linkset through the offline state     If the route Do  remains ISTb or SysB Step 10  is in service Step 24       Cycle the routeset through the offline state     If the route or routeset problem Do       still exists Step 22  no longer exists Step 26  Quasi   associated routes use routeset test messages to determine routing    availability  A problem with a quasi   associated route can be internal or  external to the DMS   STP switch     Determine if the far end has routing available for the problem route        If the far end has Do  routing available Step 12  no routing available Step 16    Use C7TU to determine if periodic routeset test messages  RSx  are being  generated by the STP        If the periodic test messages are Do  being sent
170. ffic is disrupted and the end office is flooded with C7UP logs  indicating out of sequence or missing ISUP messages     Some or all of the end office s ISUP trunk groups are partially or totally out  of service     CCS7 logs and alarms do not indicate a network problem     The following two figures show examples of troubleshooting a message sink     Note that it is necessary to coordinate control center and end office activity in  this troubleshooting procedure     Example 1  No trunks work between end offices       Note  1        PON    End offices    A links             DMS STP  DMS STP    No trunks work between end office A  and end offices B  C  D  and E   Trunk signaling between end offices B  C  D  and E is OK    Trunk signaling between end office A and all other end offices is OK   Since the common signaling paths are the A links to end offices   remove A links from service one at a time  and observe the effect     End office          A links          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 19    Troubleshooting a message sink  continued        Example 2  No trunks work between networks                      Local network 1 B link Local network 2  end offices x end offices  A DMS STP DMS STP E    A          I     gt  DMS STP DMS STP    D y H  B links  Note  1  No trunks work between local network 1 and local network 2   2  Trunk signaling between end offices A  B  C  and D is OK   3  Trunk signaling between end offices E  F  G  
171. formation  packets called signal units  The MTP level of the network is responsible for  reliable transport and delivery of signaling information across the CCS7  network  Each switch  also called a node  can format and transmit signal units  to other nodes in the network     In a CCS7 network  the system sends signaling information with the following  three types of signal units     e link status signal units  LSSU   which report SL changes of state and have  priority over other unit types    e message signal units  MSU   which transfer user information from one  node to another and are buffered until the MSU receives positive  acknowledgement    e fill in signal units  FISU   which fill the gaps between messages and are  sent when the transmit buffer is empty    Figure 1 2 shows the basic signal unit format  Table 1 2 describes each field of  a signal unit           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Figure 1 2 Basic signal unit format    Maintenance summary 1 7       8 16 8    MSU    Check SIF    Flag    8 16 8    LSSU    Flag   Check    field    FISU    Legend     BIB Backward indicator bit    BSN Backward sequence number  FIB Forward indicator bit   FISU Fill in signal unit   FSN Forward sequence number          Status          26 1 7 1 7 8 Bits  SoN LI    FSN    BSN   Flag  26 1 7 1 7 8 Bits    LI   FSN    BSN Flag  2 Gules 1 7 8 Bits  FSN  sa si   First bit  transmitted  LI Length indicator  LSSU Link status signal unit  MSU Message signal unit  SIF Signaling inf
172. g  sending  or intercepting messages is  not allowed     The C7TULINK directory also has a password protected version identified as  the C7 TULINK_ILPT7environment  This password protected version not  only accesses the same basic commands as C7 TULINK_PMT7 but also  accesses commands used to build  send  and intercept messages     The C7TULINK directory version you access depends on the entries you made  at the C7TU MAP level     None    Command parameters and variables    None    Usage examples    The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the C7TULINK command        gt C7TULINK    MAP response     C7TULINK     Explanation You have accessed the C7TU link environment              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TU directory commands 11 3  C7TULINK  end        MAP responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the C7TULINK command       MAP output Meaning and action                MODULE NOT LOADED OR NEEDS OTHER CI INCREMENT TO BE BUILT                          Meaning  The C7TULINK directory is not loaded or must be accessed through  another directory     Action  None    Undefined command   lt command gt       Meaning  The command you entered is spelled incorrectly  this directory is  accessed using another entry code  or the C7TULINK directory is not included  in this software load     Action  None                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 
173. g and changing message  table entries  refer to the sections  Building CCS7 messages    Altering CCS7  messages   and  Sending the CCS7 messages you build  in this chapter     C7TU output  Use the C7 TUREC command to direct C7TU logs to a device of your choice  or to a printer     Note  The default class for all logs is class 0  If you want to have one printer  dedicated to C7TU logs  use table LOGCLASS to specify a different class          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 5    for C7TU logs  Then use table LOGDEYV to specify a printer that will    receive only that class of logs     Figure 4 2 shows an example of a C7TU log  Table 4 3 explains the contents       of each field in the log   Figure 4 2 Example of a C7TU log  RTC_STP C7TU101 JAN16 21 28 27 3305 INFO INCOMING LINK MSG   C7 HEADER  LEN 34 MSG  02 LINK 1 SLC 0 CLLI C7LKSET  C7  STO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  2 SERV IND 5  C7 LABEL  DPC   001 001 001 OPC   002 002 002 SLS    S7 DATA FOLLOWING ROUTING LABEL  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 O01 O1       2          Table 4 3 C7TU log fields       following routing  label       Field Description   LEN Message length   MSG Message type   LINK Linkset number   SLC Link number   CLLI Linkset name  NETWORK Network indicator  PRIORITY Message priority  SERVIND Service indicator   DPC Destination point code  OPC Originating point code  SLS Signaling link selector  S7DATA CCS7 message data displayed in hexadecimal format  To    interpret t
174. gnal points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  The  valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all zones     This variable specifies the DPC knotenvermittlungsstelle  trunk tandem switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 16     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the CCITT routing message  in format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all  members     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the CCITT routing message  in format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 intercepts all  networks     This variable specifies the DPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16     This variable specifies the DPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16384  The entry of 16384 specifies all DPCs     This variable specifies the DPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  or INTL  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA format is 0 to 16  The entry of 16  intercepts all regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 format is 0 to 8  The entry  of 8 intercepts all regions     This variable specifies the DPC area unit number of the TTC or JPN message   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 intercepts all area units     This variable specifies the DPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 
175. gt  Discarding Msgs  NIL routeset    Meaning  Messages are being discarded due to a NIL routeset     Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      DTC  lt   gt  Message discard occured     Meaning  External routing is inactive     Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Command failed in DTC  lt   gt   Unknown error    Meaning  External routing is inactive  Command failed to execute     Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 13  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Command responses  Sheet 3 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Routing translation failed in DTC  lt   gt         Meaning  External routing is inactive  Command could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path   SLS  lt   gt      Command failed in CM  Unknown error     Meaning  External routing is inactive  Command could not complete     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt    DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to     Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt        Router  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to     Link  lt linkset name gt  lt   gt   lt link state gt  LIU7  lt   gt    lt PM state gt     Meaning  External routing is active  Router is routing message
176. h a space  The valid entry range is multiple data bytes     This variable specifies the number of the monitor or intercept entry  The valid  entry range is 0 to 7           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 42 C7TULINK directory commands    MASK  continued     Usage examples    The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the MASK command                          gt MASK 0 04 00  where  0  is the number of the table entry to be changed  04  is the first byte in which to enter data  00  is the data to be inserted into the mask array  MAP response   C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET       C7TU MON SIO DPC             OPC    NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU N       ET                SLS    O BOTH ANSI ALL XX SNTS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX  0 2 gA E Tg 9   E Tae 2 TS 1A 15    MATCH  00 05 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 05 11 00 00 00 00  MASK  00 FF 00 00 OF 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 00 00 00    SLS    0O BOTH ANSI ALL XX SNTS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX  Olds 2 a A 6  e 9   ATO EL L2 ES TANTS    MATCH  00 05 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 05 11 00 00 00 00  MASK  00 FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 00 00 00    TYP        GI    SLTM    TYPE       SLT    Explanation  The byte offset value changes        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 43  MASK  end        Responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Command respo
177. h table entry  CCS7 messages that pass the comparison  generate a C7TU log     For example  in Figure 4 1  the  FF  in the Mask array and the  04  in the  Match array under byte 1 indicate that messages should be monitored to see if  they have a value of 04 in byte 1  If the message also matches selection criteria  for other bytes  a C7TU log is generated     Figure 4 1 Example of a match table entry       C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC SLS TYPE  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET  0 IN ANSI NATL 00 SNTS 003 002 001 006 005 004 07 SLTM    0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ta  8 29 gt  Ee    12  13  14 15    Match  00 04 00 00 82 03 02 01 06 05 04 07 11  10 01 00  Mask  00 FF 00 OO FF FF FF FF FF FF FF 1F FF FF FF 00          When a change is made  the match tables in all in service LIUs are updated   Selected LIUs immediately start screening for messages that match the  selection criteria     For information on making and changing match table entries  refer to the  sections  Monitoring CCS7 messages    Intercepting CCS7  messages  and Using the MASK and MATCH commands  in this chapter     Note  Messages are matched against entries in the match table starting with  the first entry  After the first suitable match  the rest of the entries in the table  are not evaluated for a match  Make sure your match table entries are not  screened by a previous entry     Message table   The C7TU message table contains up to eight messages that can be sent over  a link for test purposes  For information on makin
178. he CCITT test message   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter identifies that the message to be intercepted is network type  CCITT           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 31  INTERCEPT  continued           Parameters and variables  Sheet 4 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command  CHINA  DATA    direction    d_areantw    d_austsgpt    d_austzone    d_chnsgpt    d_chnzone    d_exchange    d_gersgpt    d_group    Parameters and variables  This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter indicates that new hex data is specified  If the DATA parameter  is used  enter the necessary hex bytes  The message code may be one or two  bytes long and does not necessarily follow the routing label immediately     This variable specifies the direction of the message to be intercepted  The valid  entry values are     e IN  e OUT  e BOTH    This variable specifies the destination point code  DPC  area network of the  CCITT message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of  256 intercepts all area networks     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range for is O to 32  The entry of 32 intercepts all  signal points     This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA   The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 intercepts all zones 
179. he message data  refer to the appropriate CCS7  protocol specifications              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 6 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Monitoring CCS7 messages  To monitor for specific CCS7 messages  make an entry in the match table as  follows     e To add a monitor entry to the match table  use the MONITOR command   Make the selection criteria as specific as possible  If the criteria are too  broad  messages may flood the C7TU log buffer     You must use a valid message code  For a list of valid message codes  use  the C7TU MSGCODE command     e To remove an entry from the match table  use the REMOVE command     e To change an entry in the match table  use the REMOVE command to  remove the current entry  then enter the new entry again with the  MONITOR command     Note  If you have access to the password protected  C7TULINK_ILPT7  use the MASK and MATCH commands to change  match table entries  beginning at a specified byte  Refer to the section   Using the MASK and MATCH commands       in this chapter     e To display the match table  use the DUMP command     e To select LIUs for monitoring on their associated links  use the SELECT  command        To remove selected LIUs  use the REMOVE command     Note  The maximum number of entries in the match table  including  both monitor and intercept entries  is eight        CAUTION   Potential service disruption   If you receive an MTS103 log  reduce the number of LIUs  sel
180. his command to display all networks and associated point code  information defined in table CINETWRK     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example    Example of the DISPLAY command        gt DISPLAY  MAP response   Network_name Network type PC_information    BNROTTAWA00 ANSI7 200 201 202  BINARIANGOO CCITT  INTL2 10 3 8 2    Explanation  This is the standard response for command DISPLAY                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    14 6 MTPCVRT directory commands  DISPLAY  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP response     Command responses       Responses for the DISPLAY command       MAP output Meaning and action  The point code for network BNROTTAWA0OO is  ANSI7 030 031 032     Meaning  The point code information displays PC format and values   Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       MTPCVRT directory commands 14 7    HELP  Command  HELP  Directory  MTPCVRT  Function    Use the HELP command to view a list of commands available at the  MTPCVRT directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example    Example of the HELP command                             gt HELP   MAP response   MTP PC FORMAT CONVERSION COMMANDS    DISPLAY aane Display all the networks defined in table C7
181. ides C bus fault detection  isolation functions  and loopbacks    The ST starts CBI maintenance diagnostics  A request from the processor bus   P bus  to F bus interface starts all centrally requested ST diagnostics     C bus   The C bus communicates with LIU7s or MLIUs and the network by the NIU   The C bus is a duplicated time division multiplexed bus  The C bus operates  at 4 096 MHz with 512 channels of 10 bits for each channel  Two duplicated  C buses are present for each LIS in an LPP        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 28 Maintenance summary    The C bus maintenance monitors for the following faults   e parity failures on channels allocated to C bus ports    e parity failures on channels not allocated to C bus ports    When a C bus does not have critical faults  C bus maintenance notifies node  maintenance  Node maintenance returns the C bus to service     Because the NIU controls channel allocation  two LIUs never attempt to  transmit on the same C bus channel     Network interface unit   The NIU transfers data between the network and the C bus  The NIU acts as a  switch  The NIU provides a maximum of 10 connection paths between the 512  channels available on the C bus and the 120 channels available on DS30 links  from the network     An NIU contains two NIU units  Each NIU unit contains the following  components     e integrated processor and F bus interface  IPF   which contains 8 Mbytes of  memory for the local software load    e 
182. ier pools  IDPL  generates this log  on the computing module  CM  when 80  of transaction capabilities application part   TCAP  identifiers  either transaction or component  are in use     ACCS7 server running applications that use identifier pools  IDPL  generates this log  on the computing module  CM  when all transaction capabilities application part   TCAP  identifiers  either transaction or component  are in use     An IDPL audit reports the detection and correction of an identifier that is reserved but  not currectly in use  The identifier is corrected to be used again     Log OMAP100 generates when an operations maintenance application service  element  OMASE  decode error occurs  If OMASE or a transaction capability  application part  TCAP  cannot correctly decode the received message  this log is  generated     Log OMAP110 generates when the operations maintenance application service  element  OMASE  user   s state changes           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 14 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 13 of 14     Log  OMAP210    OMAP220    OMAP230    OMAP240    PM logs  PM102  PM103    PM104    PM105  PM106  PM128  PM181  PM182  PM183  PM184  TCAP logs  TCAP100       Definition    Log OMAP210 generates when the message transfer part  MTP  routing verification  test  MRVT  core process starts correctly  This log is generated from the originating  signaling transfer point  STP   The intermediate node and 
183. ies all priorities     This variable specifies the signaling link selector code of the test message  The  valid entry ranges are     e Oto 32 for ANSI messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages   e Oto 16 for CCITT messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages   e Oto 16 for TTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages    e Oto 32 for JPN messages  The entry of 32 selects all messages     e Oto 16 for NTC messages  The entry of 16 selects all messages     This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  Telecommunications Technical Committee              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 18 C7TULINK directory commands    BUILD  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the BUILD command        gt BUILD 0 ANSI natl 0 123456780 SLTM PARMS 01 01  MAP response     MESSAGE 0 WAS BUILT SUCCESSFULLY                Explanation  The specified message built successfully        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2     Responses for the BUILD command          MAP output Meaning and action       ERROR  CANNOT BUILD AN ECA MESSAGE                   Meaning  You entered a recognizable code  but the utility cannot build a  message for the specified code  The BUILD command exits     Action  Retry the build command with a valid message code        ERROR  INVALID MESSAGE CODE ZPE      
184. in alphabetical order all parameters    Relationships between groups of elements    When an element follows another element horizontally and you select the first    element  you also must enter the second element     ps_link    unit_no    NOFORGE  FORCE WAIT    NOWAIT       and variables that apply to the command  The table also includes the  description of each element  including replacement values and ranges for    variables     Conventions comparison  The command conventions used in this document are different than the  conventions used in MAP help screens and MAP responses  Table 7 1    Table 7 1 Comparison of the command conventions    compares these two conventions        Element    Command words    Parameters    Variable names    Hierarchy       Commands manual    Uppercase  or case sensitive  specific   boldface      gt BSY    Uppercase  or case sensitive  specific      LINK    Lowercase     ps_link    Horizontal order  left to right      gt L PDTC pm_numbers circuit    MAP screen    Uppercase or initial uppercase   BSY  Bsy    Uppercase   LINK    Lowercase  in angled brackets    lt ps_link gt     Note  Angle brackets also indicate  that the variable is required     Verticle order  top to bottom    L  lt PDTC gt   PDTC    lt pm_numbers gt   0 to 255     lt circuit gt   0 to 16         297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network non menu commands 7 47    Table 7 1 Comparison of the command conventions    Element    Defaults    Selectable  elements    Varia
185. indicates that the C7TU already is recording     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       11 10 C7TU directory commands    DPC    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes  None    DPC    C7TU    Use the DPC command to monitor a routeset for changes in availability and  congestion or to query a routeset state  The responses from the DPC command  are produced as a C7TU log     Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables             DPC command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  QUERY routeset  REPORT OFF  DPC ON  Item Description  OFF This parameter disables reporting for routeset state or congestion level changes   ON This parameter enables reporting for routeset state or congestion level changes   QUERY This parameter queries a routeset state   REPORT This parameter reports any routeset state changes or changes in congestion  level   routeset This variable specifies a valid routeset name that is datafilled in table C7RTESET        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TU directory commands 11 11    DPC  continued        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the DPC command        gt DPC REPORT OFF  MAP response      gt     Explanation  This command disables routeset state reporting              MAP responses  The following table describ
186. ing ISUP RSCs in an ANSI7  network for trunk CIC 600     Figure 4 8 Example of the INTERCEPT command        gt INTERCEPT ALL OUT ANSI ALL RSC PARMS 600  MAP display    WARNING  MSG TYPE HAS BEEN OVERWRITTEN  INT match entry setup successfully     gt MON ALL IN ANSI ALL ALL ISUP DATA    MAP display    WARNING  MSG TYPE HAS BEEN OVERWRITTEN  MON match entry setup successfully     gt STATUS    MAP display  RAERRRAE CT TIULINK Environment kar exrak    LIU7 FTA Tracing  101 4242 1000 ENABLE  102 4243 1000 ENABLE  201 4246 1000 ENABLE  205 4247 1000 ENABLE    Item Disp NI Nettype Dir Link Dist Msg SI HO H1  0 INT ALL ANSI OUT ALL EXT XXX ISUP XXX  1 MON ALL ANSI IN ALL EXT XXX ISUP XXX                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 13    Using the MASK and MATCH commands   If you have access to the password protected C7 TULINK_ILPT7  use the  MASK and MATCH commands to change match table entries beginning at a  specified byte  as follows     e To change the match array  use the MATCH command   e To change the mask array  use the MASK command     Figure 4 9 shows an example of the MASK command  The MATCH command  uses the same command syntax     For an explanation of match table entries  refer to the  Match table  section in  this chapter     Figure 4 9 shows the MASK command being used to change the value of byte  4 from  OF  to  00  in table entry 0  The MAP display shows the entry before  the change and the entry after the chang
187. ing the  type of messages that are monitored reduces the number of logs that are  generated and ensures that all intercepted messages are logged  Limiting  monitoring also makes it easy to determine which messages are being  intercepted and which are actually being transmitted over signaling  links     e To add an intercept entry to the match table  use the INTERCEPT  command  You must use a valid message code  To obtain a list of valid  message codes  use the C7 TU MSGCODE command        To remove an entry from the match table  use the REMOVE command     e To change an entry in the match table  use the REMOVE command to  remove the current entry  then enter the new entry using the MONITOR  command     Note  If you have access to the password protected  C7TULINK_ILPT7  use the MASK and MATCH commands to change  match table entries beginning at a specified byte  Refer to the section   Using the MASK and MATCH commands  in this chapter     e To display the match table  use the DUMP command        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       4 12 Trouble isolation and correction methods    e To select LIUs for intercepting on their associated links  use the SELECT  command     e To remove selected LIUs  use the REMOVE command     Figure 4 8 shows an example of the INTERCEPT command  For an  explanation of match table entries and log output  refer to the  Match  table   and C7TU output sections in this chapter     Figure 4 8 also shows an interception of outgo
188. ion       External Routing is not active  It must be active before the MIP databases  can be removed from the CCS7 DTCs                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 23  REMOVE_MTP  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the REMOVE_MTP command       Meaning  The MTP tables were not removed from the DTCs     Action  Use the ACTIVATE command to activate external routing     The MIP databases were already removed from the CCS7 DTCs  Do you want to  remove them again   y n         Meaning  The MTP tables have already been removed     Action  If you want to remove the MTP tables again  enter y  yes   If you do  not want to remove the MTP tables  enter n  no         MTP databases are being removed   The procedure will be complete when the CCS7 DTCs are stable   Meaning  The MTP table information is removed from the DTCs     Action  None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 1       9 C7RTRQRY directory commands    C7RTRQRY directory commands  Use the C7RTRQRY level to query external routing        Accessing the C7RTRQRY directory    To access the C7RTRQRY directory level  enter the following command from  the command interpreter  CI  level      gt C7RTRORY  and press the Enter key     C7RTRQRY directory commands    The following commands are available at the C7RTRQRY directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e HELP  e QUERY_EXT_ROUTING    e QUIT  e TRNSL_TRK
189. ions have been added   e the description of command QUERYRES at the C7LKSET level for SSP    e advanced troubleshooting procedures    September 1998  Standard 01 02     Command QUERYTRE at the C7LKSET level has been revised to incorporate  technical changes        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Publication history v    August 1998  Standard 01 01  first release of this document       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    vii       Contents    About this document xi  When to use this document xi  How to check the version and issue of this document xi  References in this document xi  What precautionary messages mean xii  How commands  parameters  and responses are represented xiii  Input prompt   gt   xiv  Commands and fixed parameters xiv  Variables xiv  Responses xiv          1 Maintenance summary 1 1  Maintenance philosophy 1 1  CCS7 functional description 1 1  DMS architecture 1 1  DMS tasks 1 1  DMS documentation 1 1  Maintenance philosophy 1 1  Reactive maintenance activities 1 1  Preventive maintenance activities 1 2  CCS7 functional description 1 2  CCS7 protocol 1 2  CCS7 signaling messages 1 6  TCAP messages 1 8  ISUP messages 1 11  CCS7 hardware architecture 1 14  Mapping CCS7 hardware to protocol 1 17  DMS architecture 1 18  Integrated node 1 20  DMS tasks 1 20  Gateway screening 1 20  Global title translation 1 21  Automated system maintenance 1 21  Static data audits 1 22  Channelized link access 1 23  DMS documentation 1 30    2 
190. is looped around or  when the incoming  tone is detected  the appropriate tone is sent back to the originating office  on the receive channel  depending on the type of test     3  The originating office monitors the trunk for the incoming tone expected  from the terminating office        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 19    Per call continuity tests   A per call continuity test passes if the originating office detects the expected  tone within two seconds and is within the quality parameters defined in system  tables  The following events occur     1  The originating office sends a continuity test message to inform the  terminating office that the ISUP trunk is suitable for use     2  The terminating office responds by disconnecting the test loop or the  response tone and sending an address complete message to the originating  office     Figure 4 14 shows the protocol for a successful call that includes a per call  continuity test     Figure 4 14 Protocol for successful call that includes a per call continuity test       Originating office Terminating office                                                                                  Off hook  IAM  re                          Continuity loop     lt    ee aa a a a G  Continuity message  passed   ACM     inaj  Audible Ringing  ringing    Off hook    Answer message    Call in answered state             If the originating office does not detect a valid continuity tone withi
191. is not permitted in FIELD environment       Meaning  You specified parameter ALL in a field for which this is not a valid entry   Command MONITOR did not execute     Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 57  MONITOR  continued        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 3     Responses for the MONITOR command       MAP output Meaning and action    ERROR  Invalid link number       Meaning  You specified a link number that is not datafilled for the specified linkset  in table C7LINK  The MONITOR command exits     Action  Verify the link number and retry the MONITOR command with the correct  number     ERROR  Invalid linkset name       Meaning  You specified a linkset name that does not appear in table C7_LKSET     Action  Verify the linkset name  and retry the MONITOR command with the correct  linkset     ERROR  Invalid MSGCODE ZPF          Meaning  You entered a message code that is not recognized by C7TU  The  MONITOR command exits     Action  Verify the message code and retry the command     ERROR  MATCH table full       Meaning  The match table already has eight entries  No further requests can be  made  The MONITOR command exits     Action  Remove an existing entry from the match table and retry the command           ERROR  Matching ECM messages is not permitted    Meaning  You entered a message code that was recognized by C7TU  but a match  is not allowed for the specified code  The MONITOR command exits     Action  V
192. it SLS is activated          QUIT   quit from SLS8BIT utility    Explanation  This is the standard response for command HELP              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    SLS8BIT directory commands 16 13                                        HELP  end   Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses   Command responses  Responses for the HELP command  MAP output Meaning and action  HELP   Help for the SLS8BIT utility  ENABLE   activate 8 bit SLS  DISABLE   deactivate 8 bit SLS  DISPL   Display whether 8 bit SLS is activated  QUIT   quit from SLS8BIT utility  Meaning  The response lists the commands available at level SLS8BIT and    their functions     Action  None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 14 SLS8BIT directory commands    QUIT    Command   QUIT  Directory   SLS8BIT  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit the SLS8BIT directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response   Crs       Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Explanation  You have exited the SLS8BIT directory        Response for the QUIT command       CI     Meaning  The system exited and returned to the CI level     Action  None       MAP output Meaning and action             297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    DMS 1
193. ition     Meaning     Action     Meaning     Action        MAP output Meaning and action    Activation module not found     The command failed because activation module C7SLACT is  missing     Add module C7SLACT to the software load     Could not invoke activation process     The command failed  The activation process could not be started  for an unspecified reason     Enter command ENABLE again   SLS not activated     The command failed  The activation process could not be started  for an unspecified reason     Enter command ENABLE again     Transition got stuck  8 bit SLS not activated     The command failed during the transition process    Enter command ENABLE again    Transition failed  8 bit SLS not activated   The command failed for an unknown reason     Check the activation state of 8   bit SLS using command DISPL  If  8 bit SLS is deactivated  enter command ENABLE again  If the  state of 8   bit SLS is in transition  wait until the state is stable  Check  the state again using command DISPL     Transition timeout  8 bit SLS not activated     The command failed because the transition time exceeded the  time   out value     Enter command ENABLE again        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       SLS8BIT directory commands 16 11  ENABLE  end        Command responses  Sheet 4 of 4     Responses for the ENABLE command       MAP output Meaning and action    Non_ANSI network detected in table C7NETWRK is not supported with 8 bit SLS  load balancing when routing tables a
194. k 01 Office MS 1 Link interface  output alarm shelf 1  controller unit  Input  Filler panel      Speech CPUO   CPU1 Link interface  Salut A necting pele  t Loo  controller panels        DMS core  Disk drive mawaan  CT SEMO SLM1 Link interface  it UVM    FI O OOL shelf 3  unl UVM    FI O O  UI TT    FI OAOA OO OA MON  IOE DSNE TME DPCC LPP      Office alarm system      DMS 100   DMS SuperNode  Family equipment   equipment             A DMS SP SSP is a switching office that supports CCS7 voice trunk capability   ISUP messaging   An SP provides an interface between subscriber lines and  the CCS7 network  An SSP supports TCAP messaging  which allows the SSP  to request information from CCS7 databases  like 800 Service     The DMS SP SSP combines the DMS 100 Family and DMS SuperNode  equipment  Figure 1 11 shows the DMS SP SSP configuration        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 20 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 11 DMS SP SSP configuration                                                                                                                                                                Alarm Network     Magnetic  Shelf 1 cross  00 ta  pe  DTC connect    drive FSP FSP FSP  MTM Filler  Shelf 2 panel  MSO LIM 0 1 FLIS 00  FSP FSP FSP FSP L DMS  bus  Office Network    I O  DTC 00 alarm 01 onoir MS1 LIS 1 FLIS 01  unit  DTC    Speech   Filler vO cPuo  CPU1   LIS 2 Filler panel  DTC 01 link conn panel controller       panels r DMS   core  PULIO
195. l members     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all networks     This variable specifies the DPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16     This variable specifies the DPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The valid  entry range is 0 to 16384  The entry of 16384 specifies all DPCs     This variable specifies the DPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA or  INTL  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA format is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors  all regions  The valid entry range for INTL2 format is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors  all regions     This variable specifies the DPC area unit number of the TTC or JPN message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all area units     This variable specifies the DPC cluster number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all clusters     This variable specifies the DPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC message   The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers   e Oto 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers     e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all main area numbers     This variable specifies the DPC member number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all me
196. le of the C7TUPRT command        gt C7TUPRT TEMPFILE  where   TEMPFILEis the file name  MAP response     TIME  09 14 37 INCOMING LINK MSG          C7 HEADER  LEN  34 MSG  2 LINK  1 SLC  0 CLLI  C7LKSE                C7 SIO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  2 SERV IND  5             C7 LABEL  DPC   001 001 001 OPC   002 002 002 SLS       2       C7 DATA FOLLOWING HEADER  01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01          TIME  09 14 37 OUTGOING LINK MSG       C7 HEADER  LEN  32 MSG  2 LINK  2 SLC  1 CLLI  C7LKS                      ET2          C7 SIO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  2 SERV IND  2             C7 LABEL  DPC   003 003 003 OPC   001 001 001 SLS    BODY  02 03 04 05 06 07 08 01 02    TIME  09 14 38 INVALID MESSAGE                INVALID MESSAGE TYPE                1909  55 07 E4 FF 32 45 09 A4 D2 FF C3          E9 DO AA E       TIME  09 15 01 C7TU TRACING ON LIU7 201          2    Explanation  This command string displays all CCS7 messages saved in the file named tempfile              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       11 6 C7TU directory commands  C7TUPRT  end        MAP responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the C7TUPRT command       MAP output Meaning and action       Error  File is not in C7TU format     Meaning  The specified file is not a valid C7TU log file  The command stops  execution  No C7TU log messages will be interpreted and displayed     Action  Retry the command with a valid C7TU log file    
197. lowing table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       MAP output    Responses for the HELP command    Meaning and action          MODULE    F       NOT LOADED OR N                T                   EDS OTHER CI INCREMENT TO BE BUILT                 Meaning  The directory you are trying to access is not loaded or must be  accessed through another directory     Action  None       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000          C7TU directory commands 11 15    MSGCODE  Command  MSGCODE  Directory  C7TU  Function    Use the MSGCODE command to print a list of valid message codes that are  available for use in the message code field  prompted for in the BUILD and  MONITOR commands  The message codes display in a hierarchical format   The hierarchy is distribution identification  DI   serivice indicator  SI   h0  and  h1  hOh1   Each level in the hierarchy has its own three  or four letter message  code     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       MSGCODE command parameters and variables          Command Parameters and variables   MSGCODE msgcode   Item Description   msgcode This variable specifies a message code in a three  or four letter format                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 16 C7TU directory commands    MSGCODE  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Comma
198. ly CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 14 Maintenance summary    Table 1 4 Parts of an ISUP message  Sheet 2 of 2     Part Description   Required fixed Contains required parameters of fixed length  The message   part type determines the order and length of parameters    Required Contains required parameters of variable length  The length   variable part must be defined  A pointer indicates the number of octets  between the part and the first octet of the associated  parameter    Optional part Contains fixed or variable parameters  The optional part must  include the name and the length of the parameters        CCS7 hardware architecture  A CCS7 network consists of switching and processing devices that signaling  links interconnect  The following sections provide a short description of the  nodes and signaling links     e Nodes   e Signaling links   e Routes  linksets  and routesets   e Mapping CCS7 hardware to protocol    For more information  refer to the Provisioning Manual  PLN 8991 104 and  to the Translations Guide     Nodes  CCS7 networks include the switches  nodes  that appear in Figure 1 6  Table  1 5 describes each node           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 15    Figure 1 6 CCS7 nodes          STP STP  SCP S  HE  STP STP Na    Database       STP pair A STP pair B       SP             Table 1 5 Node functions    Node Description       Signaling point Supports voice trunk capability   SP     Service Provides SP and SSP f
199. ly follow the routing label immediately           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 50 C7TULINK directory commands  MONITOR  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 3 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables    direction This variable specifies the direction of the message to be monitored  The valid entry  values are     e IN  e OUT    BOTH  d_areantw This variable specifies the destination point code  DPC  area network of the CCITT    message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors  all area networks     d_austsgpt This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all signal points     d_austzone This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all zones     d_chnsgpt This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     d_chnzone This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 monitors all zones     d_exchange This variable specifies the DPC exchange of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 monitors all exchanges     d_gersgpt This variable s
200. ly one office tries to conduct  a continuity test on the trunk        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 24 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 19 Continuity tests in glare situations       Both offices have continuity checks on the trunk       Control office Non controloffice    AEE    IAM  COT required                          COT tone                                                      y Nolooparound  required    E E COT tone    Continuity message  passed  COT tone halted       ACM  D ani  Audible Ringing  ringin  2 Off hook  Answer message  Call in answered state  One office has a continuity check on the trunk  Control office Non controloffice       SE ABE    IAM  COT required        IAM  no COT     COT tone a eo  gt     Continuity message  passed     ACM  SSS   Audible Ringing   ringing Off hook    Answer message    Call in answered state                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 25    Specifying tone combinations  There are two tones used for continuity tests     e high tone  2010 Hz   e low tone  1780 Hz     The combination of tones used for continuity tests depends on the trunk  termination types of the switches involved  Tone combinations are defined in  the CONTCHK field of the TRKSGRP table for each trunk subgroup  Table  4 6 shows the valid entries  For datafill instructions  refer to the Translations  Guide     Table 4 6 Valid entries for tone types in field CO
201. m the TTP level of the  MAP terminal           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 21    To access the TTP level of the MAP  enter the following command from the CI   command interpreter  MAP level      gt MAPCI  MTC  TRKS  TTP  and press the Enter key     The continuity test is invoked by posting the desired trunk group and typing  the following command      gt TST ICOT    Figure 4 16 shows the protocol for a passed on demand continuity test  Log  C7UP107 indicates a failed on demand continuity test  Figure 4 17 shows the  protocol for a failed on demand continuity test     Figure 4 16 Protocol for passed on demand continuity test       Originating office Terminating office                                                                                        CCR   Timer   2s LPA Timer   13s   Continuity loop    RLS   Timer   6s RLC                   DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 22 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 17 Protocol for failed on demand continuity test                                                                                        Originating office Terminating office  go  CCR  Timer  2s LPA Timer  13s  Continuity loop    wm                     COT  failed  Timer  SS    a  gt 3 min 20s  Stop  Timer  13s RLC timers                Continuity tests on previous trunks   If any trunk in a connection has performed a continuity test  the subsequent  trunks  which 
202. may be set to ON  but  this functionality will only be in effect after the TELO00009  option is on        Meaning  Operating company personnel can set the state of the SAR or CRP  functionality to ON  but the functionality is not activated until the SOC option  TELO00009 is set to ON     Action  Activate SOC option TEL00009 by setting the SOC state to ON  Refer to  the Software Optionality Control User Manual 297 8991 901                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       11 C7TU directory commands       C7TU directory commands    Use the C7TU level to access the C7TU test tool  The C7TU directory  commands monitor CCS7 messages or links on link interface unit  LIU      Accessing the C7TU directory  To access the C7TU directory level  enter the following command from the CI   command interpreter  level      gt C7TU  and press the Enter key     C7TU directory commands  The following commands are available at the C7TU directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e C7TULINK  e  C7TUPRT  e C7TUREC  e DPC   e HELP     MSGCODE  e QUIT       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    11 2 C7TU directory commands    C7TULINK    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes    C7TULINK    C7TU    Use the C7TULINK command to access the C7TULINK directory  There are  two versions of C7TULINK  The basic versions  identfied as the  C7TULINK_PMT7 environment  accesses commands that monitor messages  only  access to commands for buildin
203. mbers     This variable specifies the DPC network number of the ANSI routing message  The  valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all networks     This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid entry  range for is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all signal points           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 52 C7TULINK directory commands  MONITOR  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 5 of 8           MONITOR command parameters and variables   Command Parameters and variables   dpc_subarea This variable specifies the DPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC message   The valid entry ranges are   e Oto 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all subareas    GERMAN This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message to monitor    hex_bytes This variable string specifies the new hex bytes in the message body  The new bytes  override the existing bytes    INTL This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message    INTL2 This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message    JPN This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  JAPAN    LABEL This parameter allows the user to input the network data of the message    LINK This parameter indicates that the specified linkset will be monitored  The linkset  name foll
204. meter lists all CCS7 DTCs that are not in the DDM constant state        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example  Sheet 1 of 2     Example of the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command     gt QUERY_EXT_ROUTING LIST    MAP response           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 15  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  continued        Command example  Sheet 2 of 2     Example of the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command          External Routing Status             External Routing  Active  TP Tables  Downloaded  CCS7 DTCs  DDM Stable    Explanation  External routing has been queried  External routing is active  the CCS7 DTCs contain  MTP table information  and the DTCs are in a DDM stable state           Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command    MAP output Meaning and action       External Routing status                External Active  Routing    TP Tables  Downloaded  CCS 7    DIGS  DDM Stable    Meaning  External routing is active     Action  None       External Routing status             External Inactive  Routing    TP Tables  Removed  CCS   DIE s  Transient             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 16 C7RTR directory commands  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Responses for the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    These nodes are in tran
205. mmand Parameters and variables   ON Omitting this entry forces the system to default to selecting the specified link    ALL When used in the first position  this parameter selects all datafilled MSB7s and  LIUs as the link specification  When used in the second position  this parameter  selects all datafilled MSB7s or all datafilled LIUs as the link specification  For  MLIU  this parameter indicates that you are selecting all ports on all MLIUs    HLIU This parameter selects one or all high speed link interface units  HLIU  as the link  specification    LIU7 This parameter selects one or all CCS7 link interface units  LIU7  as the link  specification     _num This variable is the LIU number  The valid entry range is 0 to 511     log_throt_set    This variable is used to vary the C7TU log throttle in the selected LIU  The valid  entry range is 1 to 60  This entry is password protected     MLIU This parameter indicates that you are selecting multiple link interface unit  MLIU    MSB7 This parameter selects one or all MSB7s as the link specification    m_num This variable is the MSB7 number  The valid entry range is 0 to 9    NUMBER This parameter indicates that you are selecting a specific MLIU and port    OFF This parameter releases the specified link     port_number    This variable indicates the MLIU port number  The valid range is 0 to 3        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 65  SELECT  continued        Usage examples  The followi
206. mproper use of C7TU  can seriously degrade C7 traffic capacity and or cause total C7  or office failure    DO YOU WISH TO CONTINUE   Please confirm  YES or NO                     To confirm  type     gt YES       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 3  and press the Enter key   To access the C7TULINK directory  type   gt C7TULINK    and press the Enter key     C7TULINK directory commands  The following commands are available at the C7 TULINK directory level  All  of the C7TULINK commands  including those that are password protected   are described in this chapter and arranged in alphabetical order     e ALTER  see Note   e BUILD  see Note   e DISPLAY  see Note     e DUMP   e HELP   e INTERCEPT  see Note   e MASK   e MATCH   e MONITOR   e QUIT   e REMOVE   e SELECT   e SEND  see Note   e STATUS    Note  This command is visible and available only when the ILPT7  password is enabled        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 4 C7TULINK directory commands    ALTER  Command   ALTER  Directory   C7TULINK  Function    Use the ALTER command to modify a test message that was added to the  C7TU message table by the BUILD command  Message length can be  modified  The routing label can be changed by identifying a new network type   destination point code  DPC  and origination point code  OPC   and signaling  link selector  SLS   Specific bytes in the message can be changed using the  data parameter associated with a message 
207. n    ses       Responses for the MASK command       MAP output       ERROR  MASK E       Out of range     Meaning and action       NTRY 1 IS NOT IN USE    Meaning  Mask entry 1 has not been assigned     Action  Assign the entry before attempting to alter or use it            lt BYTE OFFSET gt   0 TO 15              Enter   lt BYTE          OFFSET gt    lt DATA gt            Meaning  You entered an incorrect byte offset value     Action  Reenter the command              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 44 C7TULINK directory commands    MATCH    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes    MATCH    C7TU C7TULINK    Use the MATCH command to specify bytes in the match table for which to  screen messages for monitor and intercept entries  The first 16 bytes of  incoming messages are compared to the match table entry  CCS7 messages  that pass the comparison generate a C7TU log  Previously  the entire 16 bytes  of a match entry had to be specified in order to change one byte in the match  array  This command allows you to specify the first byte in which to enter data     None    Command parameters and variables    The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables       MATCH command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables  MATCH item_no byte_offset data  Item Description    byte_offset    data    item_no       This variable specifies the first byte in which to enter data  The 
208. n 10 times within a 1 min period   Up to 14 ILLP paths have recovered more than 10 times within a 1 min period   More than 24 ILLP paths have failed or recovered within a 1 min period     The gateway screening monitor option is activated for a particular gateway screening  function  and this function is the final function performed in the screening of a  message     This log is generated when an LIU is returned to service from a manual busy  ManB   state and the delta file could not be used to data sync the LIU  If the delta file cannot  be used  the LIU takes longer to return to service  as tables C7GTT and C7GTTYPE  have to be fully downloaded from the CM     The system generates log report CCS650 when a signaling transfer point software  optionality control  STP SOC  audit finds too many tuples in a table     The system generates log report CCS651 when a signaling transfer point software  optionality control  STP SOC  audit detects active links with STP capability while the  STP SOC option is set to IDLE  When the STP SOC option is set to IDLE  an  integrated node  INode  office operates as a service switching point  SSP   Active  links in an SSP office operate without STP capability     The system generates log report CCS652 when a signaling transfer point software  optionality control  STP SOC  audit detects that 8 bit SLS is active while the STP  SOC option is set to ON  Eight bit SLS is supported only when the STP SOC option  is set to IDLE     Astatic data audit has d
209. n describes all the parameters and variables     The following subsections describe the presentation of different elements of  the command syntax  In the examples that follow the descriptions  the  elements are highlighted in gray     Presentation of command words  The command words appear in uppercase  boldface  The command appears in  lowercase where lowercase is required by case sensitivity     The command appears to the left of all other elements  parameters and  variables  in the command expansion     ps_link NOFORCE  FORCE WAIT    unit_no NOWAIT       Presentation of parameters  Parameters appear in uppercase  Parameters appear in lowercase where the  lowercase is required by case sensitivity     ps_link NOFORCE  FORCE WAIT  unit_no NOWAIT       Presentation of variables   Variable names appear in lowercase  Do not enter the variable as shown   Always replace the variable with a value  range  number  or an item from a list   Variable entries are not represented in the expansion of the command  but are  described for each variable in the Description section below the expansion     ps_link NOFORGE  FORCE WAIT    unit_no NOWAIT       Presentation of hierarchy   The order in which you must enter command elements is represented by their  order of appearance from left to right  The following example illustrates the  order of the elements        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    CCS7 network non menu commands 7 45    2 3 4  ps_link NOFORCGE    FORCE WAIT  unit_no NOWAIT
210. n two  seconds  the continuity test fails and a continuity test message indicating  failure is sent  Another continuity test is initiated 1 to 10 s later  In the interim   another trunk is tried if the caller has not yet hung up  Figure 4 15 shows the  protocol for a failed per call continuity test     If the second continuity test also fails  a continuity test is repeated  automatically every 1 to 3 min until the test passes  timeout occurs  or manual  intervention from the MAP terminal occurs  Table 4 5 lists the logs that may  be generated after a per call continuity test        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 20 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Figure 4 15 Protocol for failed per call continuity test       Originating office Terminating office             al                                                                               IAM  COT required  COT timer   lt _ lt  Or   13s  ou umer Continuity loop           LM  Timer COT  failed  Timer  10s 20s    CCR  Timer  2s LPA Timer  13s    COT  passed   RLS       RLC                Table 4 5 Some of the logs generated by a per  call continuity test       Event Log number Condition or reason   First failure C7UP107 Per call continuity test failed  C7UP111 Continuity test failed   Second failure C7UP107 Continuity recheck failed   Subsequent failures None   Pass C7UP107 Continuity recheck passed       On demand continuity tests  Conduct on demand continuity tests for each trunk fro
211. nal routing state    the router number used to route integrated services user part  ISUP   messages when external routing is active    the link  route  or routeset name and number used to route ISUP messages  when external routing is inactive    the state of the CCS7 link interface uni  LIU7  external router or link    any external routing status differences between the computing module   CM  and the extended peripheral module  XPM     None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 2     TRNSL_TRK_ROUTINGcommand parameters and variables       Command    Parameters and variables       TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING DTC ditc_no cic    PDTC pdtc_no routeset_name          Item Description   cic This variable specifies the circuit identification code of the trunk   DTC This parameter specifies the type of digital trunk controller   dtc_no This variable specifies the number of the digital trunk controller  PDTC This parameter specifies the peripheral digital trunk controller          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000          C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 9  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 2 of 2     TRNSL_TRK_ROUTINGcommand parameters and variables       Command Parameters and variables    TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING DTC ditc_no cic    PDTC pdtc_no routeset_name       Item Description  pdtc_no This variable specifies the number of the peripheral digital trunk con
212. nance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       13 6 C7UP directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   C7UP  Function    Use the HELP command to view a list of commands available at the C7UP  level     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the HELP command                    gt HELP   MAP response    C7UP  MTP User Part Flow Control Status   ACT LOLS ieia Activate UPU functionality for SI  DEACT  lt SI gt    Deactivate UPU functionality for SI  STATUS cesse oe Display UPU Status of User Parts   QU TT  83 fuse ee ERE  CLUP   HE DP seios bns Display this menu       WARNING  The ACT and DEACT commands are service impacting  WARNING  Once the  SI user activates UPU functionality the WARNING  user may cease to have  traffic should  for some WARNING  reason  the user become UNAVAILABLE              WARNING  No UPU messages are generated for deactivated WARNING  users        Explanation  This is the standard response for command HELP              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7UP directory commands 13 7  HELP  end        Responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the HELP command       MAP output    C7UP  MTP User Part Flow Control Status       Meaning and action       UPU functionality for SI  e UPU functionality for SI  PU Status of User Parts       his menu          DEACT command
213. nd   QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  Directory   C7RTRORY  Function    Use the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command to determine if  e external routing is active or inactive    e CCS7 digital trunk controllers  DTCs  contain message transfer part   MTP  table information    e all CCS7 DTCs are data distribution manager  DDM  stable    Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables   Parameters and variables    QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command parameters and variables    Command Parameters and variables       QUERY_EXT_ROUTING LIST  Item Description    LIST This parameter lists all CCS7 DTCs that are not in the DDM stable state                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 5  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  continued        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command        gt QUERY_EXT_ROUTING LIST  MAP response        External Routing Status          External Routing  Active       TP Tables  Downloaded          CES DECS  DDM Stable    Explanation External routing has been queried  External routing is active  the CCS7 DTCs contain  MTP table information  and the DTCs are in a DDM stable state              Responses  The following table provides an example of the command     Commmand responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Example of the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command    MAP output Meaning and action          External routing s
214. nd example       Example of the MSGCODE command        gt MSGCODE EXT  where    EXT is the message code                                                                   MAP response    SG CODE DESCRIPTION DI SI H1H0  EXT C7EXTERNAL 04 X XX   SNM SIGNALING NETWORK MGT   00 XX  CHM CHANGEOVER BACK MSGS     01  COO CHANGEOVER ORDER     11  COA CHANGEOVER ACK     21  CBD CHANGEBACK DECLARATION     51  CBA CHANGEBACK ACK     61    Explanation  This command string produces a list of message code fields              MAP responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the MSGCODE command    MAP output Meaning and action       INVALID MSGCODE  ZPF       message codes are displayed        Meaning  You entered a message code that is not recognized by the C7TU  No    Action  Check the message code entered to ensure it is correct and retry the  command  Otherwise  display the entire message code table by entering the  MSGCODE command with no parameters           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TU directory commands 11 17          QUIT  Command  QUIT  Directory  C7TU  Function  Use the QUIT command to exit the C7TU directory   Usage notes  None  Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables   Parameters and variables  QUIT command parameters and variables  Command Parameters and variables  1LEVEL  ALL  name  QUIT n_levels  Item Description  1LEVEL Omitting this entry forc
215. nd variables  Sheet 7 of 7     BUILD command parameters and variables       opc_mainarea    opc_mem    opc_netwk    opc_sigpoint    opc_subarea    PARMS    priority    sls    TTC    This variable specifies the OPC main area number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 32 for TTC  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers   e Oto 32 for JPN  The entry of 32 monitors all main area numbers     e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all main area numbers     This variable specifies the OPC member number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all members     This variable specifies the OPC network number of the ANSI routing message   The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all networks     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the NTC message  The valid entry  range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC subarea number of the TTC  JPN  or NTC  message  The valid entry ranges are     e Oto 16 for TTC  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 16 for JPN  The entry of 16 monitors all subareas   e Oto 256 for NTC  The entry of 256 monitors all subareas     This parameter means that for some message codes the system will generate alist  of parameters available to the user     This variable specifies the CCS7 priority of the message to be monitored  The valid  entry range is 0 to 4  The entry of 4 specif
216. ne C bus is active and the other  is inactive  Each LIS in an LPP has a C bus  LIU7s or MLIUs and NIUs use  the C bus for data messaging only     Figure 1 14 shows the bus configuration in the LPP        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 26 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 14 Bus configuration in the LPP       LIM unit 0 LIM unit1    NIU NIU                     LIU7 support of channelized access   The LIU7s associated with channelized access have the C bus interface  CBI   card  The LIU7 does not have the DS OA or V 35 card used in LIU7s that are  not channelized     MLIUs associated with channelized access have the CBI card  which gives  access to the C bus for up to four signaling data links     Figure 1 15 shows channelized LIU7 components and the actions between  these components        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 27    Figure 1 15 Channelized LIU7 components and their interactions       F bus 0       To other LIU7s    To  channel bus  controller    Channelized  bus interface  card    P bus Signaling  to F bus terminal  interface                The CBI card performs the following functions when it receives data   e selects the correct C bus data stream according to NIU activity  e selects the channel from the active C bus    e transfers data serially to the signaling terminal  ST      The CBI card performs the following functions when it transmits data   e drives the correct channels on both C buses    e prov
217. nent part   Figure 1 3 shows the format of a TCAP message  Table 1 3 describes the data  elements of a TCAP message     Transaction part   The transaction part of a TCAP message associates the message with the  application process transaction  The application process transaction consists of  one or more messages exchanged between application processes at different  signaling points     Component part  The component part of a TCAP message makes sure that units of information   in the application process transaction  are formatted and exchanged correctly        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Maintenance summary 1 9    Figure 1 3 Format of a TCAP message       Package   Total Transaction   Transaction   Transaction    type TCAP identification   ID length ID  identifier   message    ID    length identifier                   Transaction part    Component   Component Component     Component    sequence   sequence      1A ID length             Component part                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 10 Maintenance summary    Table 1 3 Data elements of a TCAP message  Sheet 1 of 2     Data element    Package type  identifier    Total TCAP  message length    Transaction  identification   ID  identifier    Transaction ID  length       Description    UNI  information flows in one direction only  Package type  identifier does not establish a transaction     Query with permission  package type identifier initiates a  transaction  destinati
218. ng table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the SELECT command        gt SELECT LIU7 0  where    0  is the LIU7 number    MAP response   Select done    Explanation  The LIU7 link 0 has been selected           Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Response for the SELECT command       MAP output Meaning and action       Error  wrong PM selection    Meaning  You entered a value that was not among the valid choices for PM  selection  The SELECT command exits     Action  Retry the command with a valid parameter    lt liu gt   lt number gt  is not defined for this office    Meaning  You attempted to select an LIU that is not datafilled for this office  The  SELECT command exits     Action  Retry the SELECT command specifying an LIU that is datafilled for this  office      lt liu gt   lt number gt  is not inservice     The LIU has been deselected       Meaning  You released an LIU number that currently is not in service  Monitoring  does not start when the LIU comes in service because the link is released  The  SELECT command continues execution     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 66 C7TULINK directory commands  SELECT  end        Command responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Response for the SELECT command       MAP output Meaning and action     lt liu gt   lt number gt  is not inservice     Tracing will b nabled when the LIU goes ins
219. nk failures       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 16 Advanced troubleshooting procedures  Troubleshooting a link that continually fails and recovers  continued     Logs generated at end offices by a thrashing A link       DMS STP        Linkset  and routeset    Linkset  and routeset       One out of  one link fails  Failure logs  Failure logs   CCS167 Route restricted CCS101 Link failures  CCS164 Link unavailable  CCS167 Route restricted  CCS175 Routeset restricted    PM and ISUP C7UP logs may follow  for STPs and SSPs    Recovery logs  Recovery logs    CCS166 Route allowed PMlogs  CCS102 Link sync  CCS163 Link unavailable  CCS155 Routeset available  CCS166 Route allowed             Common procedures  None    Action  Follow the steps to perform the procedure     Troubleshooting a link that continuously fails and recovers    At your current location    1 If you suspect a thrashing link  make sure the link has been removed from  service  lf it has not  immediately remove it from service  A thrashing link can  affect the operation of the switch        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 17    Troubleshooting a link that continually fails and recovers  end        6    7    Analyze the link failure logs in the  CCS7 Logs  chapter to determine the  cause of the thrashing link  Logs will show either a signaling terminal  ST   failure in an end office or a facility fault  Typically  a facility fault causes  ex
220. not  respond to procedures in other DMS STP maintenance documents     Remote point codes are used by the SCCP protocol layer to determine routing  availability  The status of a remote point code should be the same of its  associated routeset  If the routeset is available  InSv or ISTb   the associated  remote point code should also be available     When the remote point code state and the associated routeset state are  different  the cause is a software problem     Common procedures    Action    None    Follow the steps to perform the procedure   Troubleshooting remote point codes    At your current location                   1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary   If the problem Do  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 11  2 oo if the remote point code and its associated routeset have the same  If they Do  have the same state Step 3  do not have the same state Step 4  3 Perform the procedure Troubleshooting routes and routesets   If the problem Do  still exists Step 4  no longer exists Step 11          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 31    Troubleshooting remote point codes  continued        Cycle the associated routeset through the offline state     If the problem Do  still exists Step 5  no longer exists Step 11       Cycle the remote point code through the offline state        If the problem Do  still exists Step 6  no longer exists Step 11    This is an optional step  You can continue with thi
221. num IN linkset link_num  OUT    Description    This parameter specifies the direction for the message  The direction is in on the  link  into the node     This variable specifies the link number of the linkset on which to send the test  message     This variable specifies the name of the linkset on which to send the test message   This variable specifies the message number of the test message to be sent     This parameter specifies the sending direction for the specified message  The  direction is out on the link  into the network           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 68 C7TULINK directory commands    SEND  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the SEND command        gt SEND 1 IN C7LKSET1 0  where  lis the message number of the test message to be sent    C7LKSET1  is the name of the linkset    0  is the link number    MAP response   Insert done    Explanation  The system took test message number 1 and injected it into link number 0 in linkset  C7LKSET1        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2           Response for the SEND command       MAP output Meaning and action    ERROR  INVALID LINK NUMBER          Meaning  You entered a link number that is not datafilled for the specified linkset in  the C7LINK table  The SEND command exits     Action  Verify the link number and retry the SEND command    
222. odule and a peripheral module     The audit software detects that a link has remained in the local processor outage   LPO   faulty link  FtLk   or initializing  Init  state for at lease one audit cycle  The link  state is displayed as it was before the audit  The audit recovers the link     A signaling connection control part  SCCP  audit detects an integrity mismatch  between the computing module static data and the MSB7 or LIU static data     The audit software detects a data mismatch between the computing module and the  periperal module data for tables C NETSSN  C7GTTYPE  and C7GTT     A CCS link has failed with the reason shown in the log report  The link state displayed  is as it existed prior to the link failure     ACCS link has reached the sync or aligned  Alnd  state  and is ready to carry traffic   A link in the aligned state must be returned to service from manual busy  ManB  in  order to carry traffic     A CCS link has been attempting to align  and has failed to achieve synchronization  within a specified time              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 4 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 3 of 14     Log  CCS104    CCS105  CCS106  CCS107  CCS109    CCS120    CCS121    CCS124  CCS125  CCS140    CCS141  CCS142  CCS146    CCS148  CCS149    CCS151       Definition    The far end of a CCS link has a processor outage  The remote processor outage   RPO  can also occur when a CCS link is manually busied o
223. ommon protocol for remote operations across the CCS7 network   Log output  Log output is controlled as follows     e Log output is customized by changing the customer data tables listed in the  Translations Guide     e Commands are entered in the LOGUTIL level of the MAP that temporarily  override parameters set in the customer data tables     LOGUTIL    The LOGUTIL level of the MAP contains commands that allow you to browse  software buffers for information about messages  and to temporarily control  the routing and generation of reports     The following documents contain additional information on the operation and  features of LOGUTIL     e Log Report Reference Manual  e DMS 100 Family Maintenace and Operations Manual  297 8991 500    CCS7 network logs  Table 2 1 lists logs that are associated with a CCS7 network     Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 1 of 14           Log Definition   AUD logs   AUD577 A call traps or dies and a regular HDB is an extension linked to the call    AUD578 A call traps or dies and a large HDB is an extension block linked to the call    AUD579 A call traps or dies and an extra large HDB is an extension block linked to the call    AUDT logs   AUDT608 An audit discovers a mismatch in the 8 bit signaling link selection  SLS  states  between the computing module  CM  and a link interface unit  LIU     AUDT609 An audit reports an invalid 8 bit SLS activation state    AUDT612 A CCS audit discovers a mismatch in the link availability states
224. on       Action  None   TELO0009 must be soc_on to activate deactivate 8 bit SLS   Meaning  The command failed because SOC option TEL00009 is not active   Action  Set the state of SOC option TELO0009 to ON     8 bit SLS is currently being activated     Meaning  Command ENABLE has already been entered  8   bit SLS is in the  process of being activated     Action  None  8 bit SLS is currently being deactivated     Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the process of being deactivated  Command  ENABLE functions only when 8 bit SLS is fully deactivated     Action  None  8 bit SLS is already active   Meaning  Command ENABLE has already been entered  8   bit SLS is active     Action  None       ALLOCATION OF PROCESS POOL HAS FAILED           Meaning  The command failed because process pools could not be allocated   Action  Enter command ENABLE again     ERROR CREATING PARENT MAILBOX              Meaning  The command failed because mailboxes were not created     Action  Enter command ENABLE again        ERROR CREATING PREFERRED MAILBOX                       Meaning  The command failed because mailboxes were not created           Action  Enter command ENABLE again        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 10 SLS8BIT directory commands    ENABLE  continued     Command responses  Sheet 3 of 4     Responses for the ENABLE command       Meaning     Action     Meaning     Action   Transition failed  8 bit    Meaning     Action     Meaning     Action     Unknown error cond
225. on signaling point can terminate  transaction     Query without permission  package type identifier initiates  a transaction  destination signaling point cannot terminate  transaction     Conversation with permission  package type identifier  continues current transaction  destination signaling point  can terminate transaction     Conversation without permission  package type identifier  continues a current transaction  destination signaling point  cannot terminate transaction     Response  package type identifier indicates normal  termination of a transaction     Abort  package type identifier indicates abnormal  termination of a transaction     Indicates the total length of the TCAP message     Assigned to each transaction  the application process at the  originating and the responding signaling point assigns the  identifier to the transaction     Indicates the number of octets the transaction ID identifier uses  in the TCAP message           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Maintenance summary 1 11    Table 1 3 Data elements of a TCAP message  Sheet 2 of 2     Data element    Transaction ID    Component  sequence  identifier    Component  sequence  length    Component       Description    Application process assigns transaction ID at the originating  and the terminating signaling point  The transaction ID not  always present  depending on the package type identifier     Packagetypeidentifier Originating ID Responding ID    UNI No No  Query with permission Yes Ye
226. on to evaluate the performance of a CCS7  digital transmission path over a period of time  A C7BERT repeatedly  transmits a 2047 bit pseudo random pattern  then checks the pattern to verify  that no faults have occurred     To access the C7BERT level  enter the following command from the CI   command interpreter  MAP level      gt MAPCI   MTC  CCS  CCS7  C7LKSET  C7BERT    and press the Enter key    Applications   C7BERT tests the following    e the link termination paddleboard  PB    e the associated transmission facility  DS 0A    Test configurations   You can use the following C7BERT configurations    e loop between two signaling terminals  ST  or LIUs to test a link   e loop an ST or LIU back to itself to verify the integrity of the office   e loop between an ST or LIU and a compatible bit error test box to isolate    the location of a problem on a link    Commands  Table 4 4 lists and describes C7 BERT commands  For more instructions  refer  to the Trouble Locating and Clearing Procedures     Table 4 4 C7BERT commands  Sheet 1 of 2        Command Description   CARLOOP Activates a DS 1 remote line or payload loopback at the far end  paddle board   INJERR Inserts a single bit error on the specified link under test   LFSLOOP Invokes or removes latching or nonlatching loopback on the    specified network element    PMLOOP Adds or removes the loopback on the NT9X78 card  QUERY Queries the progress of a C7BERT  QUIT Exits from the C7BERT menu level  and returns to the    C7LKS
227. onditions  likely to affect the performance of the switch     Log types    There are over 1600 types of logs  arranged in approximately 140 groups   Messages in the following log groups must be monitored     AUD   Audit logs report the integrity of central control  CC  software  and  any attempts to correct errors     AUDT   Audit logs report the integrity of peripheral module  PM   software  and any attempts to correct errors     CCS   Common channel signaling logs report on CCS7 linkset and  routeset management functions  such as maintaining signaling linksets   restoring signaling to a link in the event of links failure     C7UP   CCS7 ISDN user part  ISUP  subsystem logs control circuit group  blocking and circuit group unblocking messages as part of ISUP trunk  maintenance     C7TU   CCS7 test utility logs display CCS7 link messages that are traced     DDM   Distributed data manager  DDM  logs monitor simultaneous  updates of data to many DMS nodes     IDPL   IDPL logs report the detection and correction of identifiers that are  in use or reserved     OMAP   Operational Measurement Application Part  OMAP  logs  document the results of message routing verification tests  MRVT         DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 2 CCS7 network logs  e PM   PM logs monitor all hardware and software systems that provide  interfaces with external line  trunk  or service facilities   e TCAP   Transaction capabilities application part  TCAP  logs provide a  c
228. onse     C7CGPA REFO 0 Action   STOP  Option None       Data   gt  Point Code  SCCPMT and SSN Range    FROM   gt  ANSI 000 000 000 9 SSN 1  TO   gt  ANSI 001 001 001 9 SSN 1    Explanation This a standard response for command GWXREF with parameter REF              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    PROG directory commands 15 5  GWXREF  continued        MAP responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Responses for the GWXREF command  Sheet 1 of 3        MAP output    Meaning and action             C7CGPA REFO 0 Action   STOP Option None  Data   gt  Point Code  SCCPMT and SSN Range    FROM   gt  ANSI 000 000 000 9 SSN 1   TO   gt  ANSI 001 001 001 9 SSN 1    Meaning  This is the standard response format for command GWXREF REF  The  response consists of four or more lines     The first line uses the following format    lt table name gt   lt reference name gt   lt rule no  gt   lt action gt   lt option gt  in which     lt table name gt   is the name of the specified table     lt reference name gt   is the name of the specified reference     lt rule no  gt   is the rule number of the reference     lt action gt   indicates whether the search stops with the table specified or continues to  another table     lt option gt   is the value from field OPTIONS in the specified table    The second line describes the data included in the next two lines   The third line contains table information for the range of  From    The fourth line contains table information f
229. or more information  refer to the Translations Guide     Recovery from failures  After restarts caused by the central control  CC  failures  system software  automatically initializes trunk data again  If the failure affects memory  the       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 22 Maintenance summary    switch uses a reset circuit procedure to realign near  and far end trunk state  information     Note  For warm restarts  automatic maintenance does not occur  Call  processing continues  New call originations are lost     Automatic maintenance features also handle DMS internal failures  such as  digital trunk controllers  DTC  and carrier outages     ISUP trunk continuity tests   The signaling component and the voice component follows separate paths in a  CCS7 network  Successful transmission of the signaling component does not  automatically guarantee voice connections  Automatic continuity tests can be  specified for trunks through datafill  For more information  refer to the chapter   Trouble isolation and correction methods  in this document     Static data audits  Static data audits make sure there are no data differences between tables  The  CM contains master copies of the tables  To relieve the load on the CM  link  interface units  LIU  and DTCs also store the information     The distributed data manager  DDM  first changes tables in the CM  After that   the DDM updates the changes in the LIUs and DTCs  If the system loses or  discards a DD
230. or the range of  To      Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       15 6 PROG directory commands    GWXREF  continued     Responses for the GWXREF command  Sheet 2 of 3     MAP output Meaning and action       1  C7ALWOPC RULO O Action  Continue  Option  None   Data   gt  Point Code Range   From   gt  ANSI7 001 000 000   To   gt  ANSI7 255 255 255   2  C7CGPA RULO 0 Action  Continue   Option  None   Data   gt  Point Code  SCCPMT and SSN range  From   gt  ANSI7 000 000 000 SCCPMT 9 SSN 0  To   gt  ANSI7 255 055 255 SCCPMT 9 SSN 255    Meaning  This is the standard response format for command GWXREF LINKSET   The response consists of four or more lines     The first line uses the following format      lt table name gt   lt reference name gt   lt rule no  gt   lt action gt   lt option gt  in which     lt table name gt   is the name of the specified table     lt reference name gt   is the name of the specified reference     lt rule no  gt   is the rule number of the reference     lt action gt     indicates whether the search stops with the table specified or continues to  another table     lt option gt   is the value from field OPTIONS in the specified table    The second line describes the data included in the next two lines   The third line contains table information for the range of  From      The fourth line contains table information for the range of  To    Action  None       There are 6 users of function C7ALWOPC RULO  C7CTWLKS LS0
231. ormation field  SIO Signaling information octet             Table 1 2 Fields of a signal unit  Sheet 1 of 2        Field    Backward indicator bit  BIB     Backward sequence number  BSN     Check bits    Flag       Description    Part of the basic error control method  which  performs signal unit sequence control and  acknowledgement functions    Sequence number of the signal unit that is  acknowledged    Indicates16 bits for error detection       Indicates the start or end of a signal unit          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 8 Maintenance summary    Table 1 2 Fields of a signal unit  Sheet 2 of 2   Field Description  Forward indicator bit  FIB  Part of the basic error control method  which    performs signal unit sequence control and  acknowledgement functions    Forward sequence number  FSN  Indicates sequence number of the signal  unit   Length indicator  LI  Indicates the number of octets to follow   0   FISU  1 or 2   LSSU    greater than 2   MSU    Signal information field  SIF  Contains signaling information  Service information octet  SIO  Contains the service indicator  SI    0 1  or 2   MTP  3   SCCP  5   ISUP    Contains the sub service field  SSF   which  indicates if the message is for the national  or international network  This field also  indicates the message priority     Present only in MSUs     Status Contains links status indications       TCAP messages    A TCAP message has two parts  the transaction part and the compo
232. ortel Networks           Publication history       July 2000    March 2000    2000Q2 Standard 06 01   The CSP14 feature 59019359  HMI Enhancement C7LKSET and  C7ROUTER MAP Levels  creates a new MAP output  START_OUTAGEB    when you try to busy the last link in a linkset or the last external router  MSH14  features 59020254 and 59020291 add a message that is displayed when SS7  messaging is performed by the Universal Signaling Point  USP   The  following command descriptions have been modified    e BSY at the C7LKSET level   e BSY at the C7ROUTER level   e C7LKSET and C7RTESET at the CCS7 level    e BSY  OFFL  QUERYFLT  RTS  and TRNSL at the C7RTESET level    2000Q1 Standard 05 01    The STP Multiple Point Code feature adds a new response to the following  commands for the Signaling Transfer Point  STP  product     e POST at the C7LKSET level  e POST at the C7RTESET level    e TRNSL at the C7RTESET level       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    iv Publication history    August 1999  99Q2 Standard 04 01     CSP12 features changed the following commands   e at the C7RTR directory      ACTIVATE      DEACTIVATE      DOWNLOAD_MTP  e at the C7LKSET level      QUERYRES      DEACT  e at the C7TULINK directory      SELECT      STATUS  Created new MLIU level     March 1999  99Q1 Standard 03 01     The SEAS and PVC levels have been updated to reflect the SEAS  Restructuring future for STP04 2 release     December 1998  98Q4 Standard 02 01     The following sect
233. oubleshooting a link that continually fails and recovers  e Troubleshooting a message sink   e Troubleshooting an ASU   e Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps   e Troubleshooting links and linksets   e Troubleshooting remote point codes   e Troubleshooting remote subsystems    e Troubleshooting routes and routesets       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 2 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    How to determine the cause of a failed link    Application   Use this procedure to to determine the cause of a failed link    Definition   Link failures can be caused by one of the following types of failures    e a failure at an end office   e one out of one link in a linkset fails   e one out of two links in a linkset fails   e two out of two links in a linkset fail    The following three figures show the logs that are generated at the end offices  for each type of link failure     Logs generated when one out of one link fails       DMS STP        Linkset  and routeset    Linkset  and routeset       One out of  one link fails  Failure logs  Failure logs   CCS167 Route restricted CCS101 Link failures  CCS164 Link unavailable  CCS175 Routeset restricted  CCS167 Route restricted    PM and ISUP C7UP logs may follow  for STPs and SSPs                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 3    How to determine the cause of a failed link  continued        Logs generated when one out of two links fails       DMS STP DMS
234. output Meaning and action    External Routing has been activated       Meaning  LIU7s are now routing ISUP messages   Action  None    External Routing is already active in the office  Do you want to reactivate  External Routing   y n        Meaning  LIU7s are already routing ISUP messages     Action  Enter y  yes  to reactivate external routing or n  no  to deactivate  external routing        The Routing Status is not sufficient to activate External Routing  Bring  more routers into service  No action taken    Meaning  External routing is not activated   Action  Bring more routers into service  Refer to table C7ROUTER     There are CCS7 DTCs or SPMs in transient states  Use the C7RTR  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command to find out which ones  or check for DDM logs                 Meaning  The CCS7 DTCs are not in a DDM stable state   Action  No action taken     The External Routing Activation data was not distributed successfully to all  nodes  Re activate or wait for a DDM audit to correct the data  Also check  for DDM logs for specification of problem nodes        Meaning  Data distribution manager has not distributed the external routing  information to all nodes     Action  Reactivate external routing or wait fora DDM audit to correct the  data  Examine DDM logs for problems     The C7ROUTER table must be datafilled with a minimum of routers to activate  external routing  Please datafill more routers           Meaning  External routing has not been activated                 DMS 10
235. ows this parameter    Iset_name This variable specifies the name of the linkset to be monitored  The valid entry is an  alphanumeric string    msg_code This variable specifies the type of message    netwk_ This variable specifies the network indicator of the message  The valid entries are as   indicator follows     INTLSP  e NATL  e NATLSP  e ALL   NTC This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be monitored is  NTC7    o_areantw This variable specifies the originating point code  OPC  area network of the CCITT  message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of 256 monitors  all area networks        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 53  MONITOR  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 6 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables          Command    o_austsgpt    o_austzone    o_chnsgpt    o_chnzone    o_exchange    o_gersgpt    O_group    o_hvst    o_intlsgpt    o_intlzone    o_kvst    oO member    o_network    o_numarea    Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  The  valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 monitors all zones     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 8 
236. pecified percentage of trunks are locked out due to a remote line controller  RLC   timeout     An ISUP trunk has timed out waiting for acknowledgement of the first RSC sent     The DDM has successfully transferred data to a PM        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 13    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 12 of 14     Log   DDM101  DDM102  DDM103  DDM104    DDM105  DDM106  DDM107  DDM108    IDPL logs    IDPL300    IDPL800  IDPL801  IDPL810    IDPL811    IDPL900    OMAP logs  OMAP 100    OMAP110       Definition   The DDM failed to download distributed data to a PM    The DDM failed to download an update to the distributed data to a PM    The DDM successfully completed the downloading of data to a node for a single table     The DDM cannot maintain data in a PM  and is caused by node failure  or when the  DDM is unable to download tables     Data was successfully downloaded to a PM   An audit of the distributed data failed   An attempt to retrieve operational measurement data failed     An error was detected on the link interface module  LIM   CCS7 data in the LIUs  connected to the LIM may be corrupted     An IDPL audit reports the detection and correction of identifiers that are reserved but  not used  The identifiers can be used     Created when 80   of the maximum number of specified identifiers  are in use   Created when the maximum number of specified identifiers are in use     ACCS7 server running applications that use identif
237. pecifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     d_group This variable specifies the DPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16     d_hvst This variable specifies the DPC Hauptvermittlungsstelle  Tandem Level Switching  Exchange  fora CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 8     d_intlsgpt This variable specifies the DPC signal point of the CCITT message in format INTL   The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all signal points     d_intlzone This variable specifies the DPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  The valid  entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors all zones     d_kvst This variable specifies the DPC Knotenvermittlungsstelle  Trunk Tandem Switching  Exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to  16              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 51  MONITOR  continued        Parameters and variables  Sheet 4 of 8     MONITOR command parameters and variables          Command    d_member    d_network    d_numarea    d_pc    d_region    dpc_areaunit    dpc_cluster    dpc_  mainarea    dpc_mem    dpc_netwk    dpc_sigpoint    Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the DPC member number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 monitors al
238. play a list of commands for the C7SARCRP  directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example    Example of the HELP command        gt HELP  MAP response     The following commands are part of the C7SARCRP increment        SET  This command sets the functionality of either SAR or CRP to either ON  or OFF  on a per subystem basis or for all subsystems     STATUS  This command provides information on the state of functioanlity of  SAR or CRP for a specific subsystem or for all subsystems     QUIT  Leaves the C7SARCRP command increment        HELP  Provides information about the commands in the C7SARCRP directory     Explanation  C7SARCRP commands display              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7SARCRP directory commands 10 3    HELP  end        Responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the HELP command       MAP output    MODULE    Meaning and          NOT LOAD       action          ED OR NEEDS OTH                   ER CI INCR    EM          ENT TO BI       EK BUILT     Meaning  The directory you are trying to access is not loaded or must be  accessed through another directory     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       10 4 C7SARCRP directory commands    QUIT  Command   QUIT  Directory   C7SARCRP  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit out of
239. r SLO  NETWORK  2 PRIORITY  1 SERV IND  3  C7 LABEL  DPC   ANSI7 200 001 004 OPC   ANSI7 200 002 001 SLS  S7 DATA FOLLOWING ROUTING LABEL  09 00 03 05 07 02 Cl FE 02 Cl FE 3B E4 39 C7 04  00 CO 41 00 E8 31 E9 2F CF 02 00 00 DO 02 04 01  F2 25 84 06 08 00 01 03 11 00 84 09 04 00 21 OA  19 39 26 10 65 DF 41 04 41 C1 20 C3 84 09 05 00  21 OA 07 54 55 34 12      7    19    29    30       Intercepting CCS7 messages    If you have access to the password protected C7TULINK_ILPT7  you can  intercept messages using the INTERCEPT command  You can intercept a       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Trouble isolation and correction methods 4 11    message before it enters the CCS7 network  or after it exits the network To  intercept specific CCS7 messages  make an entry in the match table     Note  The maximum number of entries in the match table  including both  monitor and intercept entries  is eight     CAUTION   Service disruption   Never use the intercept capabilities of C7TU in an  operating office environment  or all CCS7 messaging  traffic that matches the selection criteria will be halted in  the selected node           The following rules apply to the INTERCEPT command     e All intercept entries in the match table must come before monitor entries  in the table     e Each INTERCEPT command must be followed by a corresponding  MONITOR command     Note  For loop around trunks on a single switch  monitor only  incoming messages and intercept only outgoing messages  Limit
240. r inhibited at the far end   The link maintains synchronization  and when the far end has recovered  is ready for  traffic     A CCS link has recovered from a remote processor outage  RPO    A CCS link has been manually deactivated   A CCS7 link test has failed on the specified link     A CCS7 link has reached sync state but could not nail up  reserve  the link  As a  result  the next computing module restart will cause the link alignment to be lost     The CCS subsystem generates log report CCS120 hourly to provide detailed  performance information on any CCS7 link that has exceeded threshold values  as  determined by the operational measurements associated with this log     A link  already perceived by MTP level 3 as unavailable to SS7 user part message  traffic  has undergone a minor state change  The state change may be due to  inhibiting or uninhibiting at MTP level 3  or failure  restoration  or activation of the link  at MTP level 2  The link remains unavailable if one or more link outage conditions  persists     A key high speed link performance parameter crosses a predefined threshold value   A key high speed link performance parameter crosses a predefined threshold value     A user part unavailable  UPU  message has been received by the MTP layer in the  CM     The local user part status has changed   The UPU message has been directed  by the MTP  to an unavailable user part     The CCS7 subsystem generates log CCS146 when a message transfer part  MTP   restart proc
241. re downloaded on the XPMs    Please activate LIU7 routing and remove routing tables from XPMs before  enabling 8 bit SLS load balancing           Meaning  The command failed  8   bit SLS load balancing requires LIU7  routing if activated on a non   ANSI network type     Action  Activate LIU7 routing and remove routing tables from extended  peripheral modules  XPM         PDTC type peripheral detected in table LTCINV is not supported with 8 bit  SLS load balancing when routing tables are downloaded on the XPMs    Please activate LIU7 routing and remove routing tables from XPMs before  enabling 8 bit SLS load balancing    Meaning  The command failed  8   bit SLS load balancing requires LIU7  routing if activated on a network in which PCM digital trunk  controllers  PDTC  exist     Action  Activate LIU7 routing and remove routing tables from extended  peripheral modules  XPM               DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 12 SLS8BIT directory commands    HELP  Command   HELP  Directory   SLS8BIT  Function    Use the HELP command to view a list of commands available at the SLS8BIT  level     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the HELP command                          gt HELP   MAP response    HELP   Help for the SLS8BIT utility   ENABLE   activate 8 bit SLS   DISABLE   deactivate 8 bit SLS   DISPL   Display whether 8 b
242. rea network of the  CCITT message in format INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 256  The entry of  256 intercepts all area networks     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  AUSTRIA  The valid entry range for is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 intercepts all  signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA   The valid entry range is 0 to 32  The entry of 32 intercepts all zones     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range for is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all signal  points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format CHINA   The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 intercepts all zones     This variable specifies the OPC exchange of the CCITT message in format  CHINA  The valid entry range is 0 to 128  The entry of 128 intercepts all  exchanges     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all signal  points     This variable specifies the OPC group number of the CCITT routing message in  format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 35  INTERCEPT  continued           Parameters and variables  Sheet 8 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    o_hvst    o_intlsgpt    o_intlzone    o_k
243. rmance Monitoring Procedures    for assistance in returning the link to service     CCS165 no alarm Far end office generated a CCS7 protocol violation  Set threshold    CCS167 major A CCS7 route has restricted level of network routing  Set threshold    CCS168 major A CCS7 route has no service for network routing  Keep a record of each  occurrence                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    2 16 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 2 CCS7 network priority logs  Sheet 2 of 3     Log  CCS169    CCS170    CCS171    CCS172    CCS174    CCS175    CCS186    CCS201    CCS202    CCS203    CCS204    CCS206    CCS207    CCS224       Alarm class    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    major    major    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    no alarm    Action    ACCS7 route has received an invalid network message  Set threshold to  monitor     Verify CCS7 data to ensure that linksets and routesets are properly  defined at both the local and far end office     Verify CCS7 data to ensure that linksets and routesets are properly  defined at both the local and far end office     Investigate reasons for congestion in the network     CCS7 messages that originate in the central control  communication  module  CC CM  core have invalid destination point codes  DPC    Monitor the log and inform next level of support     If the route has failed  try to recover the route  If a transfer prohibited   TFP  message was rec
244. rs        Possibility of service interruption or degradation          CAUTION   Possible loss of service   Before continuing  confirm that you are removing the card  from the inactive unit of the peripheral module   Subscriber service will be lost if you remove a card from  the active unit           How commands  parameters  and responses are represented  Commands  parameters  and responses in this document conform to the  following conventions        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    xiv About this document    Input prompt   gt    An input prompt   gt   indicates that the information that follows is a command      gt BSY    Commands and fixed parameters  Commands and fixed parameters that are entered at a MAP terminal are shown  in uppercase letters      gt BSY CTRL    Variables  Variables are shown in lowercase letters      gt BSY CTRL ctrl_no    The letters or numbers that the variable represents must be entered  Each  variable is explained in a list that follows the command string     Responses  Responses correspond to the MAP display and are shown in a different type     FP 3 Busy CTRL 0  Command request has been submitted   FP 3 Busy CTRL 0  Command passed     The following excerpt from a procedure shows the command syntax used in  this document     1 Manually busy the CTRL on the inactive plane by typing   gt BSY CTRL ctril_no  and pressing the Enter key   where    ctrl_no  is the number of the CTRL  0 or 1     Example of a MAP response     
245. ry commands  QUIT  end        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT CLEAR  MAP response   CEU     Explanation  This command exits the C7TULINK directory and displays the C7TU MAP level   Entering the QUIT command again displays the Cl MAP level        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses          Response for the QUIT command       MAP output Meaning and action  C7TU     Meaning  You have returned to the C7TU MAP level   Action  Enter the QUIT command again to return to the Cl MAP level                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 61    REMOVE  Command  REMOVE  Directory  C7TULINK  Function    Use the REMOVE command to remove the following   e amonitor or intercept request from the match table  e a link that was previously selected with the SELECT command    e amessage that was entered by the build command from the message table    Usage notes    Use the STATUS command to display the match table before using the  REMOVE command     Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  REMOVE command parameters and variables    Command Parameters and variables       REMOVE MATCH ALL  MESSAGE number    Item Description   ALL This parameter specifies that all entries be removed    MATCH This parameter removes an entry
246. s  Query without permission Yes No  Conversation with permission No Yes  Conversation without permission Yes Yes  Response Yes Yes  Abort No Yes    Indicates the sequence of a message in a string of messages  associated with a transaction     Indicates the length of the component sequence identifier field    Provides message encoding and decoding functions  Each  message contains one or more of the following types of  components     e     Invoke  invokes an application specific operation at a  remote node    e Return result  returns the results of a successful operation  e Return error  reports an operation that has failed    e Reject  reports TCAP protocol violation  including  message format errors and TCAP errors in procedure          ISUP messages    ISUP signaling sets up  monitors  and takes down CCS7 calls on ISUP  signaling trunks  ISUP allows the following enhanced trunk call processing    capabilities     e faster call setup    e shorter holding times for call attempts that are not successful    e ability to carry voice and data at the same time       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 12 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 4 shows where ISUP messages are in the MSU  Figure 1 5 shows the  format of an ISUP message Table 1 4 describes the parts of an ISUP message     Figure 1 4 ISUP messages in message signal unit       8 16    8 26 17 1 7 8  i i AA A  ISUP message Routing  label    Bits       Optional   Mandatory Mandatory   Message   Circui
247. s are service impacting   user activates UPU functionality  the  se to have traffic should  for some  ser become UNAVAILABLE  No UPU             ACT  lt SI gt       Activate  DEACT  lt SI gt    Deactivat  STATUS Saka since Display U  QUTT 5 jancsi XLE    C UP  BSP S e aortes ati Display t  WARNING The ACT and  WARNING Once the SI  WARNING user may cea  WARNING reason the u  WARNING messages ar          Meaning  The response lists the commands available at level C7UP and  their functions  The warning indicates that enabling or disabling user part  unavailable  UPU  functionality impacts traffic  Traffic on a user part  UP   will stop if UPU is enabled and the UP becomes UNAVAILABLE     Action  None    generated for deactivated users              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    13 8 C7UP directory commands    QUIT    Command   QUIT  Directory   C7UP  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit out of the C7UP directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response   CI     Explanation  You have exited out of the C7UP directory              Responses  None       297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7UP directory commands 13 9    STATUS  Command  STATUS  Directory  C7UP  Function    Use the STATUS command to query the status of User Part Unavailable  UPU   functionality on ser
248. s step or go directly to step  8  In the case of a regional DMS STP switch  this step can be very time  consuming     Remove datafill entries in table C7GTT that are dependent on entries in table  C7NETSSN  Remove and reenter the remote point code in table C7  NETSSN        If the problem Do  still exists Step 7  no longer exists Step 11    This is an optional step  You can continue with this step or go directly to step  8     Remove and reenter the routeset     If the problem Do  still exists Step 8  no longer exists Step 11       The problem is likely a software problem   If you Do    have access to PROTEL soft  Step 9  ware listings       do not have access to PROTEL Step 10  software listings       Troubleshoot the software or contact the personnel responsible for the next  level of support     Monitor log buffers in the CM  MS  LIM  and link interface unit  LIU  and test  for indications of software problems  such as SWERRS and traps  Debug  software using the debug utility and the PROTEL program listings        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 32 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troubleshooting remote point codes  end        10 For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support   11 You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 33    Troubleshooting remote subsystems    Application  Use this procedure to troubleshoot remote
249. s to the  displayed link     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       9 14 C7RTRQRY directory commands  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Command responses  Sheet 4 of 12     Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External routing  Active   Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to    Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt   Router  lt   gt  Buffering Msgs for     Link  lt linkset name gt  lt   gt   lt link state gt  LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt     Meaning  External routing is active  Router  lt router numbers gt is buffering  messages for the link that is displayed     Action  None       External routing  Active   Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to    Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt   Router  lt   gt  Buffering Msgs for     Route  lt   gt   lt routeset name gt   lt   gt  lt linkset name gt     Meaning  External routing is active  Router  lt router number gt  is buffering  messages for the route that is displayed     Action  None       External routing  Active  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt    DTC  lt   gt  Routing Msgs to     Router  lt   gt   State LIU7  lt   gt   lt PM state gt        Router  lt   gt  Discarding Msgs  Unavail Routeset  lt routeset name gt                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 15  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continu
250. shoot an application specific unit  ASU  that does  not respond to trouble clearing procedures in other maintenance documents   ASU is a generic term for units that are mounted on a link interface shelf  LIS   or single shelf link peripheral processor  SSLPP  shelf    These units include   e CCS7 link interface units  LIU7    e multiple link interface units  MLIU    e high speed link interface units  HLIU    e high speed link router  HSLR    e Ethernet interface units  EIU     This procedure describes how to troubleshoot an ASU that cannot be busied or  returned to service     Use this procedure after basic troubleshooting methods have failed  It is  assumed that ASU cards were changed as part of the basic troubleshooting     Common procedures    Action    None    Follow the steps to perform the procedure   Troubleshooting an ASU    At your current location       1 Review maintenance actions taken to date  Repeat if necessary   If the problem Do  still exists Step 2  no longer exists Step 9       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 22 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    Troublehshooting an ASU  end        Verify all related datafill tables  Check table LIUINV to make sure that the type  of ASU specified is correct  and table SUSHELF to make sure that the type  of shelf specified is correct           If the datafill Do   is correct Step 4   is not correct Step 3  Correct the datafill    If the problem Do   still exists Step 4   no longer exists S
251. sient states          DTCO    DTEL    DCS    Meaning  DTCs 0  1  and 3 are in a DDM transient state     Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 17    QUERY_EXP_RTESETS    Command   QUERY_EXP_RTESETS  Directory   C7RTR  Function    Use the QUERY_EXP_RTESETS command to list any expanded routesets in  the office     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the QUERY_EXP_RTESETS command        gt QUERY_EXP_RTESETS  MAP response        Expanded Routesets are   e   RS CCS  21  t    RS CCS2    e RSI CCS  3    e RS_CCS_4          Explanation  Expanded routesets are in the office  The MAP display lists the expanded routesets        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 18 C7RTR directory commands  QUERY_EXP_RTESETS  end        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the QUERY_EXP_RTESETS command       MAP output Meaning and action  No expanded routesets     Meaning  Expanded routesets are not in the office     Action  None       Expanded routesets are     RS_CCS_1    RS CES 2     RS_CCS_3    e RS_CCS_4    Meaning  The command lists the expanded routesets     Action  None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTR directory commands 8 19    QUERY _MAX_RTESETS    Command   QUERY_MAX_RTESETS  Directory  
252. sion  The following elements can be  altered     e the message length   e the routing label  DPC  OPC  SLS    e specific bytes in the messages   Figure 4 11 shows an example of the ALTER command  The example shows  a CCITTISUP message in the message table being changed to an ACM  message  Entry 0 in the message table is being altered  The data is changed    starting with byte 13  The MAP display shows the entry before and after the  change     Figure 4 11 Example of the ALTER command        gt ALTER 0 DATA 13 06 16 04 00 00    MAP display before changes    C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC ORG iss  NUM TYPE LENGTH NI PR SI XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX  XXXX     0 RSC 14 0 2 ISUP     DEFAULT ROUTING LABEL        MESSAGE BYTES   Dood 20 2 4  36   8 O LO Tt be Le  14 TS 1bs lt s    08 00 FD 04 FD FD 25 00 90 00 00 F4 01 12  No user defined DISPLAY PRINT procedure provided    MAP display after changes have been entered    C7TU MESSAGE SIO DPC OPET GS  NUM TYPE LENGTH NI PR SI XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX  XXXX     0 ACM 18 0 2 ISUP     DEFAULT ROUTING LABEL        MESSAGE BYTES   Do De 2 BA EB 6 TP Be OPO LE  TA 13  1A  Te IE Pe  08 00 FD 04 FD FD 25 00 90 00 00 F4 01 06 16 04 00 00  No user defined DISPLAY PRINT procedure provided                DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    4 16 Trouble isolation and correction methods    Sending the CCS7 messages you build  Use the SEND command to send messages you build  The following  information must be known before a message is sent     e
253. sponses     Command responses       Responses for the ALTER command       MAP output Meaning and action    MESSAGE NUMBER  lt num gt HAS NOT BEEN BUILT YET                            Meaning  You entered a message number that has not been built in the  message table  The ALTER command exits     Action  Retry the ALTER command with a valid message number           THE OFFSET DOES NOT FALL WITHIN THE DEFINED MESSAGE AREA                                     Meaning  You entered a bytes offset that is outside the current length of the  test message  The test message displays in the same format as the display  command  The ALTER command exits     Action  Retry the command with the correct offset           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 10 C7TULINK directory commands    BUILD  Command   BUILD  Directory   C7TU C7TULINK  Function    Use the BUILD command to add a test message to the C7TU message table     Usage notes    CAUTION    The system cannot distinguish between CCS7 test  messages and normal CCS7 messages once they are sent  into the network           Display the CCS7 message using the C7TU DISPLAY command  Insert the  command on the link using the C7TU SEND command           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7TULINK directory commands 12 11  BUILD  continued        Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and variables  Sheet 1 of 7        BUILD command par
254. ss 2 signaling connection  control part  SCCP           297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network operational measurements 3 3    Table 3 1 CCS7 network OM groups  Sheet 3 of 3     Group  C7SCCPX    C7SMH    FBTRAFF    LIUFBUS  NCMCPUST    PM    PMTYP    TCAPERRS  TCAPUSAG       Description    Provides information on the performance and use of extended unit data and  extended unit data service messages    Provides information on Signaling Message Handling  SMH  congestion for CCS7  links  The OM group consists of 16 registers  These registers count discarded  messages  congestion level changes  and congestion level durations when an  overload of the SMH processor  SMHP  occurs     Monitors traffic OMs for the following F bus platforms in a DMS office   e     link interface unit  LIU7    e high speed link interface unit  HLIV    e high speed link router  HSLR    e multiple link interface unit  MLIU    e Ethernet interface unit  EIU    e  X 25 link interface unit  XLIU      application processing unit  APU      voice processing unit  VPU    e network interface unit  NIU     e frame relay transport unit  FRIU   Provides information about traffic at the frame bus  FBUS  interface    Provides information about the CPU occupancy of the non computing module  CM   node types    Counts errors  faults  and maintenance state changes for DMS peripheral modules   PM  with node numbers  This group performs separate counts for each PM that  associates with a DMS switch  The d
255. t  part variable part   fixed part   type soa a    Legend    BSN Backward sequence number LI Length indicator   FSN Forward sequence number MSU Message signal unit  ISUP ISDN user part SIF Signaling information field    SIO Signaling information octet                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Maintenance summary 1 13    Figure 1 5 Format of an ISUP message       Floating   Circuit   Message   Mandatory   label ID code   type code parameters     Ato F lL                       Mandatory fixed part    oo                            Pointers to   Pointer   Length Parameter    Length Parameter      parameters   to indicator   M     indicator  P       M to P optional   of  A     of LA  an part parameter      V  parameter Y         P  P    Mandatory variable part             Parameter   Length Parameter   End of    name indicator   M optional    A X of parameters       parameter  X             Optional part             Table 1 4 Parts of an ISUP message  Sheet 1 of 2        Part Description       Routing label Contains destination point code  DPC   origination point code   OPC   and signaling link selector  SLS   For each circuit  connection  the routing label must remain constant for each  message that the system transmits in the same direction     Circuit Uniquely identifies each message with an appropriate ISUP  identification trunk  to a specified routeset    code  CIC    Message type Indicates the function and format of the ISUP message                 DMS 100 Fami
256. taken        Meaning  There are routesets datafilled with a tuple index greater than 255   expanded   These tuples must be deleted or moved to a lower  index before MTP can be downloaded to DTCs     Action  Use the QUERY_EXP_RTESETS command to list the expanded  routesets  delete them before executing the DOWNLOAD_MTP  command again     Routing tables cannot be downloaded with 8 bit SLS load balancing active and  non ANSI network datafilled in table C7NETWRK    Please deactivate 8 bit SLS load balancing or remove the non ANSI network  before downloading routing tables                          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    8 10 C7RTR directory commands  DOWNLOAD _MTP  continued     Command responses  Sheet 2 of 3     Responses for the DOWNLOAD_MTP command       MAP output Meaning and action    Meaning  The 8 bit signaling link selection  SLS  Load Balancing option is  activated and non ANSI network is datafilled in table C  NETWRK   Routing tables could not be downloaded     Action  Deactivate the 8 bit SLS Load Balancing option or remove the  non ANSI network before executing the DOWNLOAD_MTP  command again     Routing tables cannot be downloaded with 8 bit SLS load balancing active and  a PDTC peripheral datafilled in table LTCINV    Please deactivate 8 bit SLS load balancing or remove the PDTC peripherals  before downloading router tables        Meaning  The 8 bit SLS Load Balancing option is active and a PCM30 digital  trunk controller  PDTC
257. tatus          External Routing  Active       TP Tables  Downloaded          CCS7   DIGS  DDM Stable    Meaning External routing is active     Action None             DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 6 C7RTRQRY directory commands  QUERY_EXT_ROUTING  end        Commmand responses  Sheet 2 of 2     Example of the QUERY_EXT_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action    External routing status          External Routing  Active or Inactive       TP Tables  Downloaded or Removed       CCST DICs  DDM Stable or Transient    These nodes are in transient states        DTCO  DTC1    DTC3    Meaning DTCs 0  1  and 3 are in a DDM transient state     Action None                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 7    QUIT  Command  QUIT  Directory  C7RTRORY  Function    Use the QUIT command to exit out of the C7RTRQRY directory     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the QUIT command        gt QUIT  MAP response     CI   gt     Explanation You have exited out of the C7RTRQRY directory                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 8 C7RTRQRY directory commands    TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING    Command    Directory    Function    Usage notes    TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING    C7RTRORY    Use the TRNSL_TRK_ ROUTING command to display the following  information     the exter
258. tep 9    Check for SWERRs  traps  and other indications of a software problem     If a software problem Do  is indicated Step 6  is not indicated Step 5       The problem is probably the backplane   Go to Step 8   The problem is probably a software problem        If you Do    have access to PROTEL soft  Step 7  ware listings    do not have access to PROTEL Step 8   software listings  Troubleshoot the software or contact the personnel responsible for the next  level of support     Monitor log buffers in the CM  MS  LIM  and link interface unit  LIU  and test  for indications of software problems such as SWERRS or traps  Debug the  software using the debug utility and the protel program listings     For further assistance  contact the personnel responsible for the next level of  support     You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard    06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 23    Troubleshooting an F bus and F bus taps    Application  Use this procedure to troubleshoot an F bus and F bus taps that do not respond  to procedures described in other maintenance documents     Definition  This procedure describes how to troubleshoot an F bus or F bus taps that are  system busy     This procedure begins after basic troubleshooting methods have failed  It is  assumed that F bus cards were changed as part of the basic troubleshooting     Organization of a two slot LIU7       To LIM unit 0 To LIM unit 1    F bus F bus F bus F bus  extender terminator
259. the DISABLE command       MAP Meaning and action  output    8 bit SLS is deactivated   Meaning  The command was successful  8   bit SLS is now inactive     Action  None    a        EL00009 must be soc_on to activate deactivate 8 bit SLS   Meaning  The command failed because SOC option TEL00009 is not active   Action  Set the state of SOC option TEL00009 to ON    All B  D link linksets must have a maximum of 8 links per linkset     Meaning  Deactivation failed  The existing B links  D links  or both have more than  8 links for each linkset     Action  Remove the additional links and enter the command again   8 bit SLS is currently being activated     Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the process of being activated  Command DISABLE  functions only when 8 bit SLS is fully activated     Action  Wait until the 8   bit SLS is in the stable activated state and enter the  DISABLE command again  Use the DISPL command to check the state  of the 8 bit SLS     8 bit SLS is currently being deactivated     Meaning  Command DISABLE has already been entered  8   bit SLS is in the  process of being deactivated     Action  None  8 bit SLS is already deactivated   Meaning  Command DISABLE has already been entered  8   bit SLS is not active     Action  None          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       16 4 SLS8BIT directory commands    DISABLE  continued     Command responses  Sheet 2 of 3     Responses for the DISABLE command          ALLOCATION OF PROCESS POOL HAS FAILED   
260. the DMS STP switch        If the link problem Do  no longer exists Step 12  still exists Step 11       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    6 6 Advanced troubleshooting procedures    How to determine the cause of a failed link  end        10 The problem is in the office at the other end of the link DMS SP SSP  DMS SCP  Change the LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or HSLR circuit cards in the office  at the other end of the link DMS SP SSP DMS SCP        If the link problem Do  no longer exists Step 12  still exists Step 11    11 Verify the LIU7  MLIU  HLIU  or HSLR cabling  and perform continuity tests on  each lead within the cable     12 Return the link to service  If you had network controls invoked  contact the  network management administrator to have controls removed  Monitor the  link s performance until you are sure the problem is no longer occurring     13 You have completed this procedure        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    Advanced troubleshooting procedures 6 7    Troubleshooting a facility fault    Application    Use this procedure to troubleshoot facility faults in a failed link     Definition    A facility fault is caused by failed cables or carrier equipment  such as  repeaters  channel banks  and digital cross connects  Use a hardware loopback  test to find the location of a facility fault  Figure    Example of a hardware  loopback test   shows an example of a loopback test conducted from the node    Identifying a facility fault       ea 
261. tricted     The SCCP management receives a message acknowledgement UDTS  The DMS  software is in error for requesting the return  or another node in the network is in error  for returning the message     The status of a local subsystem changes to in service trouble  A local subsystem is  in service trouble if less than the minimum number of instances specified in table  C7LOCSSN of the subsystem are in service or in service trouble     The status of a local subsystem instance changes to offline from the MAP terminal     The status of a local subsystem instance changes to manual busy from the MAP  terminal     The status of a local subsystem instance changes to system busy     The status of a local subsystem instance changes to in service        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       CCS7 network logs 2 9    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 8 of 14     Log  CCS236    CCS237    CCS238    CCS240  CCS241    CCS242    CCS243    CCS244    CCS249    CCS250    CCS251    CCS252       Definition    The status of a local subsystem instance changes to in service trouble  In this state   the instance only receives messages pertaining to currently active transactions  No  new transactions will start at that instance     A request for removal from service by a local subsystem has been granted or denied  from a remote node  The granting of permission may or may not result in removal from  service of the local subsystem     An invalid co ordinated state change control  CSCC 
262. troller  routeset_no This variable specifies the name of the routeset          DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    9 10 C7RTRQRY directory commands    TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued     Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command        gt TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING DTC 0 RS212001  where   0 is the dtc_number   RS212001 is the circuit identification code  cic   MAP response        External Routing  Inactive   SLS 0 to 31 are cycled through on a per call basis     Current routing path     SLS 0   DTC 0 Routing Msgs to     Link LS029000 0  InSV LIU7 40  InSv    Explanation External routing is not active and ISUP messages are routed to link LS029000 0  The  display continues for all 31 signaling link selection  SLS  codes     The information is displayed according to the following formula   SLS  lt   gt    DTC 0 Routing Msgs to     Link  lt linksetname gt     lt   gt   lt linkstate gt     LIU7  lt   gt   lt PMstate gt                 297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    C7RTRQRY directory commands 9 11  TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING  continued        Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 12        Responses for the TRNSL_TRK_ROUTING command       MAP output Meaning and action       External routing  Inactive  Current routing path    SLS  lt   gt     DTC  Routing Msgs to     Link  lt linkset name gt  lt   gt   lt link state gt
263. ts all subareas     This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message to intercept     This variable string specifies the new hex bytes in the message body  The new  hex bytes override existing hex bytes     This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message   This parameter identifies the format of the CCITT test message     This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be intercepted  is JAPAN     This parameter allows the user to input the network data of the message     This parameter indicates that the specified linkset will be intercepted  The linkset  name follows this parameter     This variable specifies the name of the linkset to be intercepted  The valid entry  is an alphanumeric string     This variable specifies the type of message           DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       12 34 C7TULINK directory commands    INTERCEPT  continued     Parameters and variables  Sheet 7 of 10     INTERCEPT command parameters and variables       Command    netwk_indicator    NTC    O_areantw    o_austsgpt    o_austzone    o_chnsgpt    o_chnzone    o_exchange    o_gersgpt    O_group       Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the network indicator of the message  The valid entries  are as follows     e INTL     INTLSP  e NATL   e NATLSP  e ALL    This parameter specifies that the network type of the message to be intercepted  is NTC7     This variable specifies the originating point code  OPC  a
264. u commands    The commands used at a MAP position belong in one of two categories  These  categories are menu and non menu  For a description of menu commands  see  the  CCS7 network menu commands  chapter in this document     Non menu commands are not associated with a MAP display  A non menu  command is entered at the its associated directory or directory level     Note  To display a list of non menu commands available from the accessed  directory  enter the following command     gt PRINT dir   and press the Enter key    where    dir is the name of the accessed directory    Command conventions used    The following sections describe the commands conventions used in this  manual      Command example  table  In the  Command example  table  the command word and any expansion  elements are represented in uppercase  boldface  except where the lowercase  is required by case sensitivity  All variable names are replaced with an example  value and are described below the command syntax      Command parameters and variables  table  The  Command parameter and variables  table consists of two sections  The  first section is the command expansion  The command expansion represents  the following characteristics     e parameters  e variables    e hierarchy  the order in which the user must enter the elements        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    7 44 CCS7 network non menu commands    e syntax  requirements of command strings     e defaults  The second sectio
265. udit cleans up any inconsistencies   Transition timeout  8 bit SLS still deactivated     Meaning  The transition process exceeded the time   out value  but 8   bit SLS was  still deactivated     Action  None  An audit cleans up any inconsistencies              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    16 6 SLS8BIT directory commands    DISPL  Command   DISPL  Directory   SLS8BIT  Function    Use the command DISPL to display the current state of 8   bit signaling link  selection  SLS      Usage notes    Set the state of SOC option TELO0009 to ON before entering this command   Refer to the Software Optionality Control User Manual  297   8991 901 for  more information on how to change the state of an option     Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command   Command example  Example of the DISPL command   gt DISPL  MAP response     8 bit SLS is activated          Explanation The 8   bit SLS is in the active state              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    SLS8BIT directory commands 16 7  DISPL  end        Responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the DISPL command       MAP output    8 bit SLS is    Meaning and action    activated       8 bit SLS is    8 bit SLS is    Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the activated state   Action  None   deactivated   Meaning  8 bit SLS is in the deactivated state   Action  None    in activation tr
266. ummary 1 3    The International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee  CCITT   Signaling System 7  SS7  defines the four layer protocol of CCS7  Figure 1 1  shows the four layer protocol of CCS7  Table 1 1 contains a description of the  functions that occur at each protocol layer     For more information  refer to the Translations Guide        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 4 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 1 CCS7 model       CCS7  layers    4    Network application processes    Transaction capabilities  application part    Presentation  Session  Transport    ISDN user part    Signaling connection  control part    Network Message  2 Link   transfer part  1 Physical                297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       Maintenance summary 1 5    Table 1 1 Functions of CCS7 protocol layers  Sheet 1 of 2     Layer  Message    transfer part   MTP     SCCP       Function    Serves as a transport system for the transfer of signaling  messages between the nodes in a network  This level includes  the following three levels     e Level 1       implements channelization and framing on the link  e Level 2       controls point to point connectivity        performs error detection and correction   synchronization  and flow control        assembles bits into signaling units  e Level 3        with signaling connection control part  SCCP   controls  end to end connectivity        notifies other nodes of faults and their effects      _ reconfigur
267. unctions and communication  switching point capabilities  for example  with CCS7 databases and toll calls    SSP     Signaling Transports messages between CCS7 nodes  transfer point   STP     Integrated node Combines the functions of an STP and an SSP   INode           Signaling links   An SL consists of signaling terminal equipment and a transmission facility   SLs exchange information between CCS7 nodes  Figure 1 7 shows CCS7 SLs   Table 1 6 describes the link types        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    1 16 Maintenance summary    Figure 1 7 CCS7 signaling links             Database    l B link quad Database    E link       Table 1 6 CCS7 links       Type    Function       A links  B links  C links    D links    E links    F links       Connect SPs  SSPs  and SCPs to STPs  Connect mated STPs in a SL quad  Connect two STP nodes to create an STP pair    Connect secondary STP pairs to primary STP pairs  not shown  in figure 1 7     Connect SPs  SSPs  and SCPs to remote STP pairs    Connect SPs  SSPs  and SCPs to each other       Routes  linksets  and routesets   A signaling message can follow different routes between nodes  If one route  fails  the signaling message can use another route  A routeset is the group of  routes that a signaling message can take     Each route uses a linkset to carry signaling messages  A linkset is a collection  of links  Each link has a direct connection between two nodes in the network        297 8991 545 Standard 0
268. valid entry range  is 0 to 15     This variable specifies the data to be placed in the array  Separate each data byte  with a space  The valid entry range is multiple data bytes     This variable specifies the number of the table entry to be changed  The valid  entry range is 0 to 7        297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       C7TULINK directory commands 12 45  MATCH  continued        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the MATCH command        gt MATCH 0 01 06                            where  0  is the number of the table entry to be changed  01  is the first byte in which to enter data  06  is the data to be inserted into the match table  MAP response   C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC SLS TYPE  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET  0 BOTH ANSI ALL XX SNTS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXSLTM    OU A232 4S 6 Tg 10  Ly T2003  TA IS       MATCH  00 05 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 05 11 00 00 00 00  MASK  00 FF 00 00 OF 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 00 00 00                            C7TU MON SIO DPC OPC SLS TYPE  NUM DIR NET NI PR SI MEM CLU NET MEM CLU NET  0 BOTH ANSI ALL XX SNTS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXXX SLIM    0L 2 SOA Se E T 89 FOLE 2 STAY A       MATCH  00 06 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 05 11 00 00 00 00  MASK  00 FF 00 00 OF 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 00 00 00    Explanation  The byte offset value is changed              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    12 46 C7TULINK directory commands
269. variables    CONVERT command parameters and variables       Command Parameters and Variables   CONVERT network_name pc_format   Item Description   network_name This variable specifies the name of the network to be converted    pc_format This variable specifies the new point code formats  Valid entries are  German     INTL2  and Basic in network type CCITT7              297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000    MTPCVRT directory commands 14 3  CONVERT  continued        Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example       Example of the CONVERT command        gt CONVERT CCITT7_NET GERMAN  where    CCITT7_NET  is the network name    GERMAN  is the PC format    MAP response     Conversion complete     Explanation  The network was successfully converted to format German              Responses  The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses  Sheet 1 of 2        Responses for the CONVERT command    MAP output Meaning and action       PC format not allowed     Meaning  You attempted to convert an invalid point code format     Action  None          Network  lt network_name gt  is not defined in table C7NETWRK    Meaning  You entered an invalid network name     Action  Retry the command with a valid network name   No data defined for the network     Meaning  A network table error occurred  This message rarely occurs     Action  Retry the command     Wrong network type                 DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide
270. vated gt  indicates whether UPU is active    lt UPU User gt  indicates whether the UP supports UPU functionality     lt State gt  is the state of the UP  AVAILABLE indicates that the UP is able  to receive messages  UNAVAILABLE indicates that the UP is not able to  receive messages  UNEQUIPPED indicates that the UP is not equipped  on the local switch     Action  None          297 8991 545 Standard 06 01 July 2000       14 1       14 MTPCVRT directory commands       MTPCVRT directory commands    Use the MTPCVRT directory to convert the network to the new specified point  code  PC  format     Accessing the MTPCVRT directory  To access the MTPCVRT directory level  enter the following command from  the CI  command interpreter  level      gt MTPCVRT  and press the Enter key     MTPCVRT directory commands  The following commands are available at the MTPCVRT directory level  The  commands are arranged in alphabetical order     e CONVERT  e DISPLAY  e HELP     QUIT       DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    14 2  MTPCVRT directory commands    CONVERT  Command   CONVERT  Directory   MTPCVRT  Function    Use CONVERT command to convert a network to a new point code  PC   format  For example  use the command to convert a network from format Basic  to format German or INTL2 or from format German or INTL2 to format Basic     Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  The following table describes the command parameters and variables     Parameters and 
271. vice indicators  SI      Usage notes  None    Command parameters and variables  None    Usage examples  The following table provides an example of the command     Command example    Example of the STATUS command                                         gt STATUS   MAP response    User Service UPU UPU State  Part Indicator Activated User  SCOP 3 y y AVAILABLE  TUP 4 y y AVAILABLE  ISDN_UP 5 n y AVAILABLE  DUP_CALL_AND_CIRCUIT 6 n y AVAILABLE  DUP_MAINTENANCE 7 n y AVAILABLE  TEST_UP 8 n y AVAILABLE  TUP_PLUS Ta n y AVAILABLE    Explanation  The response lists the status of all local MTP user parts              DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2    13 10 C7UP directory commands    STATUS  end        Responses    The following table describes the MAP responses     Command responses       Responses for the STATUS command                            MAP output Meaning and action   User Service UPU UPU State  Part Indicator Activated User  SCCP 3 y AVAILABLE  TUP 4 y y AVAILABLE  ISDN_UP 5 n y AVAILABLE  DUP_CALL_AND_CIRCUIT 6 n y AVAILABLE  DUP_MAINTENANCE 7 n y AVAILABLE  TEST_UP 8 n y AVAILABLE  TUP_PLUS 15 n y AVAILABLE          Meaning  This is the normal response of the STATUS command  The  report consists of a two line header  followed by one or more lines that  contain information regarding the status of each user part  UP  in which      lt USER PART gt  is the name of the UP    lt Service Indicator gt  is the associated number of the UP    lt UPU Acti
272. vst    o_member    o_network    o_numarea    o_pc    o_region    opc_areaunit    opc_cluster    Parameters and variables    This variable specifies the OPC hauptvermittlungsstelle  tandem level switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 8     This variable specifies the OPC signal point of the CCITT message in format  INTL  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all signal points     This variable specifies the OPC zone of the CCITT message in format INTL  The  valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all zones     This variable specifies an OPC knotenvermittlungsstelle  trunk tandem switching  exchange  for a CCITT message in format GERMAN  The number ranges from 0  to 16     This variable specifies the OPC member number of the CCITT routing message  in format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 8  The entry of 8 intercepts all  members     This variable specifies the OPC network number of the CCITT routing message  in format INTL2  The valid entry range is 0 to 16  The entry of 16 intercepts all  networks     This variable specifies the OPC number area of the CCITT message in format  GERMAN  The number ranges from 0 to 16     This variable specifies the OPC of the CCITT message in format BASIC  The  valid entry range is 0 to 16384     This variable specifies the OPC region of the CCITT message in format AUSTRIA  or INTL2  The valid entry range for AUSTRIA is 0 to 16  The entry of 16  intercepts 
273. ying to define  its own network address which consists of point code and subsystem number     An extended unit data  XUDT  or an extended unit data service  KUDTS  message is  received from the CCS7 network that contains a bad optional parameter  an incorrect  or unknown optional parameter  or an incorrect optional parameter length     The local subsystem enters an alarm state with the Freephone Services alarm     An instance of a local subsystem  SSI  which uses Connection Oriented SCCP  experiences deload     A local subsystem that uses Connection Oriented SCCP has experienced deload as  aresult of at least one of its instances experiencing deload  The rest of the subsystem  instances  SSI  are in the in service  Insv  or in service trouble  ISTB  state        DMS 100 Family CCS7 Maintenance Guide Volume 1 of 2 2000Q2       2 10 CCS7 network logs    Table 2 1 Summary of CCS7 network logs  Sheet 9 of 14     Log  CCS253    CCS254    CCS402  CCS403  CCS404  CCS506    CCS601    CCS650    CCS651    CCS652    CCS701    CCS703    CCS730    CCS731       Definition    This message is generated if a timeout has occurred during the reassembly of a  XUDT message  The message being processed has more than 1024 bytes of data   A message is being processed that requires segmentation but the subsystem has not  been enabled for segmentation and reassembly     The system generates log CCS254 when message routing fails in the computing  module  CM      Up to 14 ILLP paths have failed more tha
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Venus S9  94.2KB  Demarrage rapide  reactivation of dormant account application form  Argus Camera Bean - Carabiner Digital Camera User Manual  IRPLDIM4E User Manual - International Rectifier  TY-CE42PS20 - CCTV Center    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file